Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

WO2016165128A1 - 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备 - Google Patents

传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016165128A1
WO2016165128A1 PCT/CN2015/076879 CN2015076879W WO2016165128A1 WO 2016165128 A1 WO2016165128 A1 WO 2016165128A1 CN 2015076879 W CN2015076879 W CN 2015076879W WO 2016165128 A1 WO2016165128 A1 WO 2016165128A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
main beam
signal
main
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2015/076879
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张健
李元杰
曲秉玉
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2015/076879 priority Critical patent/WO2016165128A1/zh
Priority to EP15888833.9A priority patent/EP3280068B1/en
Priority to CN201580078695.8A priority patent/CN107534467B/zh
Publication of WO2016165128A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016165128A1/zh
Priority to US15/785,079 priority patent/US10542544B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621—Feedback content
    • H04B7/0626—Channel coefficients, e.g. channel state information [CSI]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621—Feedback content
    • H04B7/063—Parameters other than those covered in groups H04B7/0623 - H04B7/0634, e.g. channel matrix rank or transmit mode selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • H04B7/0868—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining
    • H04B7/088—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and combining using beam selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications and, more particularly, to a method of transmitting information, a base station, and a user equipment.
  • the Centimeter Wave band usually refers to the spectrum in the range of 3 GHz to 30 GHz
  • the millimeter wave band usually refers to the spectrum in the range of 30 GHz to 300 GHz, which can be collectively referred to as millimeter wave. Since the millimeter wave has a large amount of available bandwidth, it will become a potential target spectrum for the future development of 5G communication and 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Long Term Evolution Advanced (LTE-A).
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution Advanced
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • Wired Wireless Local Area Network
  • the prior art has not used the 6 GHz or higher frequency band for cellular communication, and the main challenge for the millimeter wave high frequency band for cellular communication is that there is a large free space attenuation in this band, and air absorption, rain, fog, buildings or other objects. The attenuation caused by factors such as absorption and scattering is very serious.
  • Beamforming technology is considered to be a potential technology to compensate for the millimeter wave significant path loss problem. Massive MIMO or Large Scale MIMO systems are considered to implement beams in the millimeter wave band. The potential direction of shaping technology.
  • the IEEE 802.11ad standard supports beamforming.
  • the process of beam training between two nodes for communication is roughly as follows: Node 1 transmits a training beacon (Beacon) to a plurality of different directions in a beam manner, and node 2 is accurate.
  • the omni-directional (Quasi-omni) mode receives and identifies the best beam a; then the node 2 transmits the beacons in a plurality of different directions in a beam manner, and the node 1 receives in a quasi-omnidirectional manner to identify the best beam b;
  • Node 2 reports the best beam a to node 1 and node 2 reports the best beam b to node 1 to find the best matching beam pair, followed by data communication in the direction of the beam pair.
  • 802.11ad is generally used for indoor short-range point-to-point communication, wave
  • the beam training process is more complicated, the delay is larger, the efficiency is lower, and it cannot be directly applied to the cellular mobile communication system.
  • the existing cellular communication is in the low frequency band, and the common signals of the cell, such as the Synchronization Channel and the Broadcast Channel, generally use the omnidirectional transmission mode. If the cellular communication system is in the millimeter wave high frequency band, if the public signal is still used for the public signal, The omnidirectional transmission mode will result in a limited transmission range of the public signal, for example, tens of meters, which is disadvantageous to the power consumption of the base station and the coverage and capacity of the cell.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a method for transmitting information, a base station, and a user equipment, which can determine a main beam used by a base station to send a downlink signal to a UE, which is beneficial to improving communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • a method for transmitting information includes: receiving, by a UE, a beam indication signal on at least one beam sent by a base station, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, where the UE is configured according to the at least one beam
  • the beam indicator signal determines identification information of the at least one beam
  • the UE determines a main beam used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE according to a signal quality of the at least one beam
  • the UE sends a first beam report to the base station
  • the message, the first beam report message carries the identification information of the main beam.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality on the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, the UE determines the main The beam is abnormal; or if the UE does not detect the downlink signal on the main beam within the second predetermined time period, the UE determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: when the main beam is abnormal, the UE sends a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam The report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal; or, when the main beam is abnormal, the UE sends an SRS to the base station on the second SRS resource, where the base station configures the first SRS resource and the first Two SRS resources, and instructing the UE to send an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and send an SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the UE, beam receiving indication information sent by the base station on the low frequency cell,
  • the beam receiving indication information indicates that the UE receives a downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the UE receives a downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; and the UE acquires a signal of at least one beam of the high frequency cell Quality; the UE feeds back a beam with the best signal quality to the base station as a new main beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one of the following: a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam, a CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, a CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and an RRM corresponding to the main beam. Measurement results.
  • the specific implementation is The uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • the method further The UE generates one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam and the main beam, and receives the one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the method further The UE generates one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam according to the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam and the main beam, and performs on one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the base station sends uplink information, where one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the method further The UE sends an uplink SRS on one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, so that the base station determines an uplink main beam of the UE according to the measurement result of the uplink SRS of the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the UE receives the uplink main beam identification information sent by the base station; the UE sends an uplink signal on the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • the specific implementation is The base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the method further The method includes: determining, by the UE, the at least one secondary beam according to a signal quality of the at least one beam, where a maximum number of the secondary beams is configured by the base station for the UE, or the base station and the UE pre-agreed.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality of the main beam is smaller than the first If the signal quality of the first auxiliary beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the third predetermined time period, the UE uses the primary beam as a secondary beam, and the first secondary beam is used as a new one. The main beam and report the identification information of the new main beam and the auxiliary beam to the base station.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects the signal quality of the second secondary beam If the signal quality of the first beam is greater than the third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, the UE replaces the second secondary beam with the first beam as the new secondary beam. And transmitting the identification information of the first beam and the second auxiliary beam to the base station, where the first beam is the main beam of the UE and other beams than the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further includes: If the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the UE are both less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the UE attempts to connect to the base station on the beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier. The communication is performed, wherein the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are both disabled.
  • the method further includes: if the current main beam of the UE is abnormal, the UE selects the pre-configuration The candidate beam identifies a corresponding beam as the main beam, wherein the candidate beam The corresponding beam is identified for use when the primary beam fails.
  • the method further includes: when the UE enters the high frequency cell, the UE sends a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell, so that the base station is configured according to the The discovery signal of the UE transmits a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam of the location of the UE's discovery signal.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • a method for transmitting information includes: the base station transmitting, to the UE, a beam indication signal, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, and the base station receives the first feedback of the UE a beam report message, wherein the first beam report message carries identification information of a main beam in the at least one beam, the main beam is determined by the UE according to a signal quality of the at least one beam; the base station reports a message according to the first beam Determine the main beam.
  • the method further includes: detecting, by the base station, an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; and when the base station is in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected, the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal, or if the base station detects that the measured signal quality of the UE in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold, the base station It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the main beam.
  • the method further includes: when the base station receives the SRS sent by the UE on the second SRS resource, determining that the main beam is abnormal, where the base station is The UE configures the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource, and indicates that the UE sends an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and sends an SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one of the following Information: the physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam, the CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, the CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and the RRM measurement corresponding to the main beam Quantity results.
  • the method further The base station receives the second beam report information sent by the UE, and the second beam report information indicates that the main beam operation is abnormal.
  • the specific implementation is The uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • the method further include:
  • the base station pre-configures corresponding one or more receive beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE;
  • the base station pre-configures corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE.
  • the specific implementation is The base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further The base station determines, according to the first beam report message, at least one secondary beam of the primary beam, where the first beam report message further carries identification information of the at least one secondary beam of the primary beam.
  • the method further The base station acquires, by the base station, the signal quality of the uplink SRS sent by the UE on the uplink beam corresponding to the beam other than the main beam in the at least one beam; the base station selects at least one uplink signal of the uplink SRS in the at least one beam.
  • One beam serves as the secondary beam of the main beam.
  • the method further includes: the base station transmitting, at the low frequency cell, identification information of the at least one beam to the UE, so that the UE is And finding, by the high frequency cell, a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam, and receiving downlink information on a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam; the base station transmitting downlink information on one or more beams in the at least one beam .
  • the specific implementation The base station pre-configures at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, wherein when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station and the UE are represented by at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the beam performs downlink communication.
  • the method further includes: the base station receiving the discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell; and determining, by the base station, the location direction of the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE; The base station determines the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, where the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • a method for transmitting information includes: receiving, by a UE, a beam indication signal on at least one beam sent by a base station, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, where the UE is configured according to the at least one beam
  • the beam indicating signal acquires the identification information of the at least one beam; the UE acquires the signal quality information of the at least one beam; the UE sends a first beam report message to the base station, where the first beam report message carries the signal of the at least one beam Quality information; the UE receives the main beam identification information sent by the base station, and determines the main beam according to the main beam identification information.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality on the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, the UE determines the main Beam abnormality; or if the UE detects within a second predetermined time period If the downlink signal on the main beam is not available, the UE determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: when the main beam is abnormal, the UE sends a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam The report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal; or when the main beam is abnormal, the UE sends an SRS to the base station on the second sounding reference signal SRS resource, where the base station configures the first SRS resource for the UE and The second SRS resource indicates that the UE sends an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and sends an SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the first beam report message includes at least one of the following Information: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the UE receives the beam receiving indication information sent by the base station on the low frequency cell, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the UE receives the downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the UE acquires at least one beam of the high frequency cell Signal quality; the UE feeds back the signal quality of the at least one beam to the base station.
  • the specific implementation is The uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • a sixth possible implementation manner include:
  • the UE generates one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the main beam and one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam, and receives the base station on one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the downlink information, where the one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the method further includes: the UE generating one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam according to the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam and the main beam, and performing one or more uplinks corresponding to the main beam
  • the uplink information is sent to the base station, and the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the method is further The method includes: transmitting, by using one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, an uplink SRS, so that the base station determines an uplink main beam of the UE according to a measurement result of one or more uplink SRSs corresponding to the main beam; and receiving, by the UE, the base station The uplink main beam identification information that is sent; the UE sends an uplink signal on the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • the specific implementation is The base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the method further The method includes: determining, by the UE, the at least one secondary beam according to the first beam report message, where the first beam report message further carries identification information of the at least one secondary beam.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects the main beam If the signal quality is smaller than the second predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first auxiliary beam is greater than the third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the third predetermined time period, the UE identifies the primary beam and the first secondary beam. And corresponding channel quality is sent to the base station.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects the second auxiliary If the signal quality of the beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, the UE identifies the first beam and the second secondary beam Information and corresponding channel quality are sent to the base station.
  • the method further includes: If the channel quality of the current primary beam and all secondary beams of the UE is less than the fourth predetermined a threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the UE attempts to communicate with the base station on a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier, where the candidate beam identifier corresponding beam is used as the main beam and all the auxiliary Used when the beam is ineffective.
  • the method further includes: if the current main beam of the UE is abnormal The UE selects a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier as the main beam, where the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam fails.
  • the method further includes: when the UE enters the high frequency cell, the UE sends a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell, so that the base station is configured according to the The discovery signal of the UE transmits a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam of the location of the UE's discovery signal.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • a method for transmitting information includes: the base station transmitting, to the user equipment UE, a beam indication signal, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, and the base station receives the UE feedback a first beam report message, where the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam; and the base station determines, according to signal quality information of the at least one beam, a primary used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE Beam.
  • the method further includes: detecting, by the base station, an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; if the base station is in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected, the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal, or if the base station detects that the measured signal quality of the UE in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold, the base station It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the main beam.
  • the method further includes: if the base station receives the SRS sent by the UE on the SRS resource, determining that the main beam is abnormal, where the base station is the UE Configuring a first SRS resource and the second SRS resource, and indicating that the UE is in a primary wave
  • the SRS is transmitted from the first SRS resource when the bundle is working normally, and the SRS is sent from the second SRS resource when the primary beam is abnormal.
  • the specific implementation is as follows: the signal quality information is at least one type of information: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, the main The CSI measurement result corresponding to the beam and the RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries the physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the base station receives the second beam report information sent by the UE, and the second beam report information indicates that the main beam operation is abnormal.
  • the specific implementation is The uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • a seventh possible implementation manner include:
  • the base station pre-configures corresponding one or more receive beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE;
  • the base station pre-configures corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE.
  • the specific implementation is The base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station includes: determining, by the base station, at least one auxiliary beam of the main beam according to signal quality information of the at least one beam.
  • the method further includes: acquiring, by the base station, an uplink beam corresponding to a beam of the UE other than the main beam in the at least one beam The signal quality of the uplink SRS sent on the uplink; the base station selects at least one beam with better signal quality of the uplink SRS as the auxiliary beam of the main beam in the at least one beam.
  • the method The base station further includes: at the low frequency cell, the identifier information of the at least one beam is sent to the UE, so that the UE searches for the beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, and corresponds to the identifier of the at least one beam.
  • the downlink information is received on the beam; the base station transmits downlink information on one or more of the at least one beam.
  • the base station is pre-configured each At least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam, wherein when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station and the UE perform downlink communication by using a beam represented by at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the method further includes: the base station receiving the discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell; and determining, by the base station, the location direction of the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE; The base station determines the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, where the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • the fifth aspect provides a user equipment, where the user equipment includes: a receiving unit, configured to receive a beam indication signal on the at least one beam sent by the base station, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam, and the acquiring unit is configured to: Acquiring the identification information of the at least one beam according to the beam indication signal on the at least one beam; the acquiring unit is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam; and determining, configured to determine the signal quality according to the signal quality of the at least one beam Base station to use The main beam used by the user equipment to send the downlink signal; the sending unit is configured to send a first beam report message to the base station, where the first beam report message carries the identification information of the main beam.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: if the signal quality detected on the main beam in the first predetermined time period is less than a first predetermined threshold, determine that the main beam occurs Abnormal; or if the downlink signal on the main beam is not detected within the second predetermined time period, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: when the main beam is abnormal, send a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam is The report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal; or, when the main beam is abnormal, the SRS is sent to the base station on the second sounding reference signal SRS resource, where the base station configures the first SRS resource for the user equipment and The second SRS resource indicates that the user equipment sends an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and sends an SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the receiving unit And receiving, by the base station, the beam receiving indication information sent by the base station, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the user equipment receives the downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the receiving unit is further configured to be used in the high frequency cell Receiving a downlink signal on at least one beam; the acquiring unit is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the sending unit is further configured to use the best signal quality in the at least one beam of the high frequency cell The beam is fed back to the base station as a new main beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one of the following: a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam, a CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, a CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and an RRM corresponding to the main beam. Measurement results.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that is sent by the user equipment to the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the user equipment.
  • the receiving unit Also used for one or more receive beam directions corresponding to the main beam and the main beam
  • the quantity information generates one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam, and receives downlink information of the base station on one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam, where one or more receiving beam vectors corresponding to the main beam
  • the information is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit And generating, by the primary beam and the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the primary beam, one or more uplink beams corresponding to the primary beam, and performing the uplink beam on the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the primary beam.
  • the base station sends uplink information, where one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit And the method further includes: sending, by the base station, an uplink SRS according to the measurement result of the uplink SRS of the at least one uplink beam; the receiving unit is further configured to receive the base station.
  • the uplink main beam identification information that is sent; the sending unit is further configured to send an uplink signal on the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • the specific implementation is The base station and the user equipment pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the determining unit And determining, by the signal quality of the at least one beam, the at least one secondary beam, wherein the maximum number of the secondary beams is configured by the base station for the user equipment, or the base station and the user equipment pre-agreed.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: when the user equipment detects the signal of the main beam If the quality of the first auxiliary beam is greater than the third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the third predetermined time period, the primary beam is used as the secondary beam, and the first secondary beam is used as the new one.
  • the main beam; the transmitting unit is further configured to report the identification information of the new main beam and the auxiliary beam to the base station.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: when the user equipment detects that the signal quality of the second auxiliary beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and If the duration is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, the second auxiliary beam is replaced by the first beam as the new secondary beam; the sending unit is further configured to send the identification information of the first beam and the secondary beam to the base station.
  • the first beam is the main beam and other beams in the beam of the user equipment except the auxiliary beam.
  • the sending unit is further used After the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the user equipment is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the attempt is performed on the beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier.
  • the base station performs communication, wherein the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are both disabled.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: when the current main beam of the user equipment is abnormal, select the pre- The beam corresponding to the configured candidate beam identifier is used as the main beam, and the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam fails.
  • the sending unit is further configured to: when the user equipment enters the high frequency cell, send a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell, so that the base station is located in the location of the discovery signal of the user equipment according to the discovery signal of the user equipment.
  • a beam indication signal is sent to the user equipment on at least one beam.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • the sixth aspect provides a base station, where the base station includes: a sending unit, configured to send, to the user equipment UE, a beam indication signal, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, and a receiving unit, configured to receive a first beam report message that is sent by the UE, where the first beam report message carries identification information of a main beam in the at least one beam, where the main beam is configured by Determining, according to the signal quality of the at least one beam, the determining unit, configured to determine the main beam according to the first beam report message.
  • the base station further includes: a detecting unit, configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; the determining unit is further configured to: if the detecting If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, the unit determines that the main beam is abnormal, or if the detecting unit detects the measurement signal quality of the UE in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam. If it is less than the first predetermined threshold, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by using the second sounding reference signal SRS resource, the SRS sent by the UE; the determining unit is further configured to: when the receiving unit is in the second Receiving, by the SRS resource, the SRS sent by the UE, determining that the main beam is abnormal, wherein the base station configures the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource for the UE, and indicates that the UE is configured when the main beam is working normally.
  • the first SRS resource sends an SRS, and the SRS is sent from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one of the following The information is: the physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam, the CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, the CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and the RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the receiving unit And is further configured to receive second beam report information sent by the UE, where the second beam report information indicates that the main beam work is abnormal.
  • the specific implementation is The uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • the base station further Includes a first configuration unit for:
  • Preconfiguring one or more corresponding ones of each of at least one beam of the UE Receive beam vector information;
  • Corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information is pre-configured for each of at least one of the beams of the UE.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the determining unit The method further includes determining, according to the first beam report message, at least one secondary beam of the primary beam, where the first beam report message further carries identification information of the at least one secondary beam of the primary beam.
  • a good at least one beam is used as the auxiliary beam of the main beam.
  • the sending unit And the identifier information of the at least one beam is sent to the UE on the low frequency cell, so that the UE searches for the beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, and is on the beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam.
  • Receiving downlink information; the sending unit is further configured to send downlink information on one or more beams in the at least one beam.
  • the base station And a second configuration unit configured to: pre-configure at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where, when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station and the UE pass at least corresponding to the main beam A beam represented by a candidate beam identifier performs downlink communication.
  • the receiving unit Before the sending unit sends the beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell; the determining unit is further configured to use the discovery signal of the UE. Determining a location direction of the UE, and determining the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, where the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • the seventh aspect provides a user equipment, where the user equipment includes: a receiving unit, configured to receive a beam indication signal on at least one beam sent by the base station, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, and an acquiring unit is configured to: Acquiring the identification information of the at least one beam according to the beam indication signal on the at least one beam; the acquiring unit is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam, and the sending unit is configured to send a first beam report message to the base station, where The first beam report message carries the signal quality information of the at least one beam; the receiving unit is further configured to receive the main beam identification information sent by the base station; and the determining unit is configured to determine the main beam according to the main beam identification information.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: if the signal quality detected on the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, determine that the main beam occurs Abnormal; or if the downlink signal on the main beam is not detected within the second predetermined time period, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the sending unit is further configured to: when the main beam is abnormal, send a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam is The report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal; or, when the main beam is abnormal, the SRS is sent to the base station on the second SRS resource, where the base station configures the first SRS resource and the second for the user equipment
  • the SRS resource indicates that the user equipment sends an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and sends an SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the first beam report message includes at least one of the following Information: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the receiving unit And receiving, by the base station, the beam receiving indication information sent by the base station, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the user equipment receives the downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the receiving unit is further configured to be used in the high frequency cell The at least one beam receives the downlink signal; the acquiring unit is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the sending unit is further configured to feed back the signal quality of the at least one beam to the base station.
  • the user equipment The uplink time-frequency resource for transmitting the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the user equipment.
  • the receiving unit configured to generate one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam and the main beam, and receive the one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • Downlink information of the base station where one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit And generating, by the primary beam and the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the primary beam, one or more uplink beams corresponding to the primary beam, and performing the uplink beam on the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the primary beam.
  • the base station sends uplink information, where one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit And the uplink SRS is sent to the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, so that the base station determines the uplink main beam of the user equipment according to the measurement result of the uplink SRS of the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam;
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive the uplink main beam identification information sent by the base station;
  • the sending unit is further configured to send an uplink signal on the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • the base station and the user equipment pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the determining unit The method further includes determining, according to the first beam report message, the at least one secondary beam, wherein the first beam report message further carries identification information of the at least one secondary beam.
  • the sending unit is further configured to: when the user equipment detects the main If the signal quality of the beam is less than a second predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first auxiliary beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the third predetermined time period, the identification information of the primary beam and the first secondary beam is And corresponding channel quality is sent to the base station.
  • the sending unit is further configured to: when the user equipment detects the The signal quality of the second auxiliary beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, and the identifiers of the first beam and the second secondary beam are Information and corresponding channel quality are sent to the base station.
  • the sending unit is further used After the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the user equipment is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the attempt is performed on the beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier.
  • the base station performs communication, wherein the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are both disabled.
  • the determining unit is further configured to: when the user equipment is current When the beam is abnormal, the beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier is selected as the main beam, and the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam fails.
  • the sending unit is further configured to: when the user equipment enters the high frequency cell, send a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell, so that the base station is configured according to the discovery signal of the user equipment.
  • a beam indication signal is sent to the user equipment on at least one beam of the location of the discovery signal of the user equipment.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • a base station includes: a sending unit, configured to send, to the UE, a beam indication signal, where the beam indication signal carries identification information of a beam, and a receiving unit, configured to receive the UE a first beam report message, wherein the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam; and the determining unit is configured to determine, according to the signal quality information of the at least one beam, the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE The main beam used at the time.
  • the base station further includes: a detecting unit, configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; the determining unit is further configured to: if the detecting If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, the unit determines that the main beam is abnormal, or if the detecting unit detects the measurement signal quality of the UE in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam. If it is less than the first predetermined threshold, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by using the second SRS resource, the SRS sent by the UE, where the determining unit is further configured to: when the receiving unit is on the second SRS resource Receiving the SRS sent by the UE, determining that the main beam is abnormal, wherein the base station configures the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource for the UE, and indicates that the UE is from the first SRS when the main beam is working normally.
  • the resource transmits an SRS, and the SRS is transmitted from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the specific implementation is as follows: the signal quality information is at least one type of information: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, the main The CSI measurement result corresponding to the beam and the RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries the physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive second beam report information sent by the UE, where the second beam report information indicates the main The beam work is abnormal.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • the base station further Includes a first configuration unit for:
  • Corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information is pre-configured for each of at least one of the beams of the UE.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the determining unit The method is further configured to: determine at least one auxiliary beam of the main beam according to signal quality information of the at least one beam.
  • a good at least one beam is used as the auxiliary beam of the main beam.
  • the sending The unit is further configured to send, at the low frequency cell, identification information of the at least one beam to the UE, So that the UE finds a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, and receives downlink information on a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam; the sending unit is further configured to use one of the at least one beam The downlink information is sent on multiple beams.
  • the base station further includes a second configuration unit, configured to pre-configure at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and the UE pass at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams fail The indicated beam performs downlink communication.
  • the receiving unit Before the sending unit sends the beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell, and the determining unit is further configured to determine the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE. a location direction, and determining the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, wherein the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • the UE obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by using the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal on the at least one beam sent by the base station, and according to the The signal quality of the at least one beam determines the main beam used by the base station to send the downlink signal to the UE, which is beneficial to improving the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal carrying the identification information on at least one beam, and determines according to the signal quality of the at least one beam fed back by the UE.
  • the base beam used by the base station to transmit the downlink signal to the UE is beneficial to improving the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a flow chart of a method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a scenario in which a base station directs a transmit beam according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a flow chart of an interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a flow chart of another interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of still another interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a main beam communication failure according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information after an abnormality of a main beam according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another interaction method for transmitting information after an abnormality of a main beam according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is an interaction flowchart of a secondary beam change according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the interaction of transmitting information after both the main beam and the auxiliary beam fail in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of still another method for interacting uplink beam transmission information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of still another method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart of still another interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of still another interaction method for transmitting information after a main beam abnormality according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart of still another interaction method for transmitting information after a main beam abnormality according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • 19 is a flow chart of still another method of transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is another schematic structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is another schematic structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of still another user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of still another base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of still another user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of still another base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • W-identification information eband Code Division Multiple Access Wireless
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • a user equipment which may also be called a mobile terminal, a mobile user equipment, or the like, may communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (eg, RAN, Radio Access Network).
  • the user equipment may be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal, for example, a portable, pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile device,
  • the wireless access network exchanges languages and/or data.
  • the base station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in GSM or CDMA, or a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station (eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in LTE.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB base station
  • eNB evolved base station
  • e-NodeB evolutional Node B
  • LTE-A Carrier Aggregation can obtain larger bandwidth by aggregating multiple consecutive or non-contiguous Component Carriers (CCs), thereby increasing peak data rate and system throughput.
  • the CC that is aggregated by the UE is also called a serving cell, and includes one primary cell (PCell) and 0 to four secondary cells (SCells).
  • the primary cell is responsible for the non-access stratum (NAS) layer security, and the secondary cell mainly provides additional radio resources for data communication.
  • the CA supports PCell switching and SCell addition, deletion, activation, and deactivation.
  • Beamforming The data is first weighted and transmitted at the transmitting end to form a narrow transmit beam, and the energy is aimed at the target user, thereby improving the demodulation signal-to-noise ratio of the target user, which is particularly effective for improving the throughput of the cell edge user.
  • Beamforming can achieve benefits such as array gain, diversity gain, and multiplexing gain.
  • the same principle can also be applied to the reception of beamforming signals.
  • the receiving end aligns the energy with the transmit beam by pre-weighting, so that a higher gain can be obtained.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the lower frequency carrier and the millimeter wave carrier in LTE-A are aggregated to provide users with higher bandwidth and higher capacity.
  • the lower frequency band carrier is used as the primary cell (PCell)
  • the millimeter wave frequency band is used as the secondary cell (SCell)
  • the PCell and the SCell can be co-located or non-co-located (Non Co-Located)
  • the SCell is located in the PCell.
  • the LTE-A base station providing the PCell and one or more millimeter-wave small base stations or remote radio heads (RRHs) providing one or more SCells are backhauled by optical fiber or wireless connection ( Backhaul) communication.
  • the wireless backhaul can use the microwave or millimeter wave band, which can be the same or different from the band where the SCell is located.
  • PCell provides extensive coverage and mobility management, and SCell provides hotspot coverage to increase data communication throughput.
  • the beamforming technique involved in various embodiments of the present invention may refer to either a horizontal beam or a vertical beam.
  • the method of the embodiment of the present invention is also applicable to a scenario in which a millimeter wave small base station provides a PCell service.
  • FIG. 2 is a flow chart of a method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of Figure 2 is performed by a UE.
  • the UE receives the beam indication signal on the at least one beam sent by the base station, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam.
  • the base station is a millimeter wave (mmWave) small base station, or a base station of a higher frequency cell above 3 GHz.
  • mmWave millimeter wave
  • the base station can transmit the beam indication signal through multiple types of signals, and the base station periodically transmits the common signal in a beam manner and carries the beam identity (Beam Identity, referred to as Beam Id) information in the beam.
  • Beam Id is used to uniquely identify a beam, and each Beam Id corresponds to a precoding codebook information or a set of antenna weight or vector information.
  • the UE periodically receives the beam carrying the beam indication signal to obtain the identification information carried in the beam.
  • the UE determines, according to a beam indication signal on the at least one beam, identification information of the at least one beam.
  • the base station may scramble the identification information of the beam by using a primary synchronization channel or a secondary synchronization channel that is transmitted by using a beam, or broadcast the beam information of the beam through a beam-transmitted broadcast channel, or by using a beam-transmitted specialization. Common channel is used to indicate the identification letter of the beam Interest, and so on.
  • the beam indication signal may be a discovery signal of a cell or a discovery reference signal (DRS), for example, at least one or more of the following signals: a primary synchronization signal PSS, a secondary synchronization Signal SSS, broadcast channel BCH information, system information broadcast (SIB, System Information Broadcast).
  • the UE obtains the identification information of the beam by parsing the above signal.
  • the UE acquires a signal quality of the at least one beam.
  • the UE obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by measuring the signal on the at least one beam.
  • the UE determines, according to a signal quality of the at least one beam, a main beam used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE.
  • main beam mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention refers to the downlink main beam; similarly, the auxiliary beam mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention refers to the downlink auxiliary beam unless otherwise specified.
  • the main beam used by the base station to transmit downlink signals to the UE refers to the main beam used by the base station to subsequently send downlink signals to the UE.
  • Beam Id is used to uniquely identify a beam, and each Beam Id corresponds to a precoding codebook information or a set of antenna weight or vector information. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present invention, the main beam represents a precoding codebook information corresponding to the Beam Id of the main beam or a beam resource or communication represented by a set of antenna weight or vector information. path.
  • the meaning of the auxiliary beam is similar.
  • the base station may send a downlink signal to the UE by using the main beam and zero to multiple auxiliary beams.
  • the main beam is the beam with the best downlink signal quality in the beam measured by the UE; the base station preferentially communicates with the UE through the main beam.
  • the base station may also select 0 to multiple secondary beams to communicate with the UE; the secondary beam is generally used to assist in transmitting data signals.
  • the auxiliary beam can also be used to carry a common signal when the main beam works abnormally, so that the UE side can receive the common signal sent by the base station through the auxiliary beam, thereby enhancing the reliability of the downlink communication.
  • the beams transmitted by the base station in the same beam direction all refer to the same beam resource, and can be used for one beam vector weight representation.
  • the base station sends a downlink signal to the UE on the main beam, where the base station transmits a beam in a beam direction corresponding to the main beam, and the transmitted beam carries a downlink signal that is sent to the UE.
  • the UE sends a first beam report message to the base station, where the first beam report message carries Identification information with the main beam.
  • the base station may send the beam indication signal in a cyclic manner or in two cyclic manners. For one cycle, the base station sequentially transmits beam information to different beam directions in one cycle, so that the beam can cover the entire sector; The UE to the beam feeds back the identification information of its beam to the base station. In the next cycle, the base station and the UE respectively perform the above process again.
  • the base station transmits the beam according to the above one cycle, and the UE that receives the beam feeds back the identification information of the beam to the base station.
  • the base station In loop 2 (inner loop), the base station only transmits the beam to the beam position of the UE, and does not send the beam to the direction where the UE does not exist, so as to reduce the interference to the neighboring area and save energy, as shown in FIG. Show.
  • Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 may use different cycles, such as Cycle 1 using a larger cycle, Cycle 2 using a smaller cycle, and Cycle 2 occurring between two adjacent Cycle 1 cycles.
  • the UE obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by using the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal of the at least one beam sent by the base station, and further determines that the base station sends the downlink signal to the UE according to the signal quality of the at least one beam.
  • the main beam used is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one of the following: a physical cell identifier (PCI) corresponding to the main beam, a CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, and a CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, The RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the UE may also carry the measurement result of the PCI and the main beam in the first beam message.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality on the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, the UE determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the first predetermined time period and the first predetermined threshold may be pre-agreed by the base station and the UE, or configured by the base station for the UE, or protocol-defined.
  • the signal quality of the beam may be the Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) or the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) or the Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) of the detected beam. ) or Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), and so on.
  • SINR Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
  • RSRP Reference Signal Received Power
  • RSSQ Reference Signal Received Quality
  • the quality of the signal detected on the main beam during the first predetermined time period may refer to the average signal quality detected on the main beam during the first predetermined time period.
  • the method further includes: if the UE does not detect the downlink signal on the primary beam within the second predetermined time period, the UE determines that the primary beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: the UE sending a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the UE may send a second beam report to the base station on the low frequency cell or a second beam report on the secondary beam of the high frequency cell to report that the base beam of the UE is abnormal.
  • the UE may communicate with the base station through the low frequency cell or the high frequency cell.
  • the low frequency cell referred to in the embodiment of the present invention refers to the low frequency cell accessed by the UE.
  • the high frequency cell in the embodiment of the present invention refers to the high frequency cell accessed by the UE.
  • the low frequency cell (or high frequency cell) used by the UE to communicate with the base station mentioned later in the present invention refers to the low frequency cell (or high frequency cell) accessed by the UE.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the UE, an SRS to the base station on a second Sounding Reference Signal (SRS) resource, where
  • the base station configures the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource for the UE, and indicates that the UE sends an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and sends an SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the UE may send an SRS to the base station by using the second SRS resource of the high frequency cell to report that the main beam of the UE is abnormal.
  • the base station and the UE may also specify resources required for other dedicated signals and dedicated signals to report whether the main beam is abnormal.
  • the UE informs the base station by determining the beam abnormality, so that the base station can perform corresponding processing. For example, the base station can start to use the secondary beam with the best signal quality in the secondary beam to transmit the downlink signal, and so on.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the UE, beam receiving indication information sent by the base station, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the UE is in at least one of the high frequency cells.
  • the UE performs signal reception and measurement on at least one beam of the high frequency cell according to the beam receiving indication information received on the low frequency cell of the base station, and feeds back a new main beam to the base station, so that the base station can be in the new main station.
  • Downlink communication with the UE on the beam enhances the reliability of downlink communication between the base station and the UE.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is that the base station is the The UE is configured, either pre-agreed by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the method further includes: the UE generates one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the main beam and one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam, and the corresponding one of the main beams
  • the downlink information of the base station is received on the multiple receive beams, where the one or more receive beam vector information corresponding to the primary beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the receiving end obtains a higher receiving gain of the main beam by generating a receiving beam of the main beam and aligning the energy with the transmitting main beam.
  • the method further includes: the UE generates one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam according to the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam and the main beam, and the corresponding one of the main beams
  • the uplink information is sent to the base station on the uplink beam, and the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the method further includes: the UE transmitting an uplink SRS on one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, so that the base station determines the uplink SRS according to the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the uplink main beam of the UE the UE receives the uplink main beam identification information sent by the base station; the UE sends an uplink signal on the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • the UE determines the uplink SRS transmission beam according to the downlink beam information, so that the base station performs uplink channel estimation to determine a preferred uplink main beam, and then selects a preferred uplink main beam to transmit an uplink signal, so that the uplink transmission gain of the UE can be improved.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the UE, the at least one secondary beam according to a signal quality of the at least one beam, where a maximum number of the secondary beams is configured by the base station for the UE , or the base station and the UE pre-agreed.
  • the base station and the UE may perform communication only on the main beam, or may perform multi-beam communication through the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one type of information: a physical cell identifier (PCI) corresponding to the at least one auxiliary beam, CSI-RS port information corresponding to the at least one auxiliary beam, and the at least one auxiliary beam.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the UE may further carry the measurement result of the PCI corresponding to the at least one auxiliary beam and the at least one auxiliary beam in the first beam message.
  • the base station side may be based on the first wave.
  • the bundle report message determines processing operations such as subsequent update and switching of the main beam and/or the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further includes: the UE generates one or more receive beams corresponding to the first auxiliary beam according to the first auxiliary beam and the one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the first auxiliary beam, and Receiving downlink information of the base station in the first auxiliary beam on one or more receiving beams corresponding to the first auxiliary beam, where the first auxiliary beam is a secondary beam of the primary beam, and the first auxiliary beam corresponds to one Or multiple receive beam vector information is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the receiving end allocates energy to the transmitting auxiliary beam by generating a receiving beam of the auxiliary beam, so that a higher receiving gain for the auxiliary beam can be obtained.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality of the primary beam is less than a second predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first secondary beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the foregoing duration If the UE is greater than the third predetermined time period, the UE uses the primary beam as a secondary beam, uses the first secondary beam as a new primary beam, and reports the identification information of the new primary beam and the secondary beam to the base station.
  • the auxiliary beam is adjusted according to the channel quality of the beam, so that the channel quality of the main beam used by the base station and the UE can be maintained at a good channel quality level, thereby ensuring communication quality when the base station communicates with the UE. .
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality of the second secondary beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the foregoing continues If the time is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, the UE replaces the second auxiliary beam with the first beam as the new auxiliary beam, and sends identification information of the first beam and the second auxiliary beam to the base station, where The first beam is the main beam and other beams than the auxiliary beam in the beam of the UE.
  • the auxiliary beam is maintained according to the channel quality of the beam, so that the channel quality of the secondary beam used by the base station to communicate with the UE can be guaranteed, which is beneficial to improving the reliability of communication between the base station and the UE.
  • the method further includes: if the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the UE are both less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the UE is in the pre-configured candidate beam. An attempt is made to communicate with the base station on the corresponding beam, wherein the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the primary beam and all the secondary beams are both disabled.
  • the pre-configured candidate beam is selected as a beam for communication between the base station and the UE, and the communication can be quickly resumed when all the beams fail.
  • the method further includes: if the current main beam of the UE is abnormal, the UE selects a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier as a main beam, where the candidate beam The corresponding beam is identified for use when the primary beam fails.
  • the pre-configured beam is selected as the main beam, and the downlink communication between the base station and the UE can be quickly restored.
  • the method further includes: when the UE enters the high frequency cell, the UE sends a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell. So that the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE on at least one beam of the location of the discovery signal of the UE.
  • the process of sending a discovery signal to the base station to trigger the base station to send a beam indication signal to the UE is beneficial to the base station to save energy and reduce interference.
  • the base station is a millimeter-wave small base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam.
  • the base station periodically transmits a beam indication signal on the at least one beam in a beam manner, and carries beam identification (Beam Identity, Beam Id) information in the beam.
  • Beam Id is used to uniquely identify a beam, and each Beam Id corresponds to a precoding codebook information or a set of antenna weight or vector information.
  • the base station may scramble the Beam Id of the beam through a primary synchronization channel or a secondary synchronization channel that is transmitted by a beam or a Beam Id that broadcasts the beam through a beam-transmitted broadcast channel, or a dedicated common channel that is transmitted by a beam.
  • the Beam Id that transmits the beam.
  • the beam indication signal may be a discovery signal (Discovery Signal) or a discovery reference signal (DRS) of the cell, for example, the beam indication signal may be a dedicated cell discovery signal or at least one of the following signals. Or a plurality of: Primary Synchronization Channel (PSS), Secondary Synchronization Channel (SSS), Channel State Information-Reference Signal (CSI-RS), Cell Reference Signal (Cell) Reference Signal (CRS), Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH), System Information Broadcast (SIB), and signals dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Channel
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Channel
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information-Reference Signal
  • Cell Cell Reference Signal
  • CRS Cell Reference Signal
  • PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel
  • SIB System Information Broadcast
  • the base station and the UE may pre-determine the periodic configuration information of the PSS, the SSS, the PBCH, the system information block 1 (SIB1), the SIB2, and the like of the SCell; or the base station may notify the UE of the PSS, SSS, and the SCell by using the system information of the PCell.
  • Periodic configuration information of PBCH, SIB1, and SIB2 Alternatively, the base station may send periodic configuration information of the PSS, SSS, PBCH, SIB1, and SIB2 of the SCell to the UE through the dedicated signaling on the PCell; or the base station may notify the UE of the PSS, SSS, and PBCH of the SCell by using the system information of the SCell. , periodic configuration information of SIB1, SIB2, etc.
  • the base station when the base station notifies the UE of the periodic configuration information of the PSS, the SSS, the PBCH, the SIB1, the SIB2, and the like of the SCell through the system information or the dedicated signaling of the PCell, the UE does not need to acquire synchronization with the SCell in advance;
  • the periodic configuration information of the PSS, the SSS, the PBCH, the SIB1, the SIB2, and the like of the SCell is notified to the UE by using the system information of the SCell, the UE needs to synchronize with the SCell, and after reading the synchronization with the SCell, read the system information of the SCell to obtain the foregoing period.
  • Configuration information when the base station notifies the UE of the periodic configuration information of the PSS, the SSS, the PBCH, the SIB1, the SIB2, and the like of the SCell through the system information or the dedicated signaling of the PCell, the UE does not need to acquire synchronization with the SCell in advance;
  • the PSS, SSS, PBCH, System Information Block 1 (SIB1), and SIB2 information are transmitted by using a beam method, and the period information is associated with the corresponding beam, for example, having the same period but different time offsets for different beam Ids. .
  • the millimeter wave small base station transmits PSS/SSS in the direction of Beam Id 0 in subframe 0, and transmits PSS/SSS in the direction of Beam Id 1 in subframe 1 with a period of 10 ms; for example, the millimeter wave small base station is Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) symbol 0 of subframe 0 transmits PSS/SSS in the direction of Beam Id 0, and PS symbol 2 in subframe 0 transmits PSS in the direction of Beam Id 1 /SSS.
  • Synchronization signals and different system messages may have the same or different period and time offsets. When the period and time offsets are the same, the signals on the same subframe (or symbol) can be superimposed, that is, the sync signal and different system messages can transmit signals on the same subframe (or symbol).
  • the UE acquires identifier information of the beam.
  • the base station and the UE may pre-determine the periodic configuration information of the PSS, the SSS, the PBCH, the system information block 1 (SIB1), the SIB2, and the like of the SCell; or the UE may obtain the PSS of the SCell from the system information of the PCell, The periodic configuration information of the SSS, the PBCH, the SIB1, the SIB2, etc., or the UE may obtain the periodic configuration information of the PSS, the SSS, the PBCH, the SIB1, the SIB2, etc. of the SCell according to the dedicated signaling sent by the PCell; or the UE may be based on the SCell system.
  • the information acquires periodic configuration information of the PSS, SSS, PBCH, SIB1, and SIB2 of the SCell.
  • the UE performs blind detection according to the above cycle information to acquire at least one Beam Id information. For example, the UE traverses the PSS/SSS/PBCH period and time offset corresponding to each Beam Id to detect the synchronization channel or PBCH to obtain the Beam Id information. Specifically, the UE can acquire synchronization with the SCell by detecting the PSS and SSS of the SCell. If the base station scrambles the Beam Id information through the synchronization channel, the UE After the synchronization channel is detected, the Bear Id information can be obtained. If the base station transmits the Beam Id information through the PBCH of the SCell, the UE and the SCell acquire the synchronization, and then read the PBCH information of the SCell to obtain the Beam Id information.
  • the UE may receive beams from different directions and/or different millimeter wave small base stations and acquire multiple Beam Id information.
  • the UE acquires a signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by measuring at least one beam indicated by the at least one beam identifier carried by the beam indication signal.
  • the signal quality of the beam may be a Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) or a Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) or a Reference Signal Received Power (Reference Signal). Received Power, RSRP) or Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ).
  • SINR Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio
  • RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication
  • REference Signal Reference Signal Received Power
  • Received Power RSRP
  • Reference Signal Received Quality RSRQ
  • the UE obtains the measurement result of the beam by measuring the above signal quality parameter of the beam.
  • the measurement result of the beam may be Channel State Information Reference Signal (CSI-RS) port information, Channel State Information (CSI-RS) measurement result, or CSI-based.
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
  • RRM Radio Resource Management
  • the UE determines a primary beam or a primary beam and a secondary beam.
  • the base station can configure the maximum number of secondary beam Ids for the UE. Specifically, the base station may configure the maximum number of Secondary Beam Ids for the UE by using PSS, SSS, PBCH, SIB1, SIB2, etc., which may be recorded as N.
  • the UE may determine the primary beam and the secondary beam according to the signal quality of each beam.
  • the UE may use the average of the signal qualities measured by the beam for a predetermined period of time as the signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE may determine a beam of the best beam quality in the predetermined time period t1 as a primary beam.
  • the auxiliary beam when determining the auxiliary beam, if the signal quality of the beam of the UE is greater than the predetermined threshold Y1 and the duration is greater than t2, the beam is allowed to serve as the secondary beam of the UE; and the UE can select at most N beams.
  • the auxiliary beam selected by the UE is at least zero and at most N.
  • the UE may select no more than N beams from the beams allowed as the secondary beams as the auxiliary beams according to the signal quality.
  • N (or less than N) with the best signal quality may be directly selected as the auxiliary beam regardless of whether the signal quality of the beam of the UE is greater than a predetermined threshold Y1.
  • the UE may sort according to the size of the detected parameters such as SINR or RSSI, and then determine the primary beam and the secondary beam.
  • the detected parameters such as SINR or RSSI
  • the sizes of t1, t2, and Y1 may be pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or configured by the base station for the UE, or set by the UE itself, or specified by the protocol.
  • the UE feeds back information about the main beam or the main beam and the auxiliary beam to the base station.
  • the information about the beams can be reported to the base station by using the beam report message, which may be recorded as the first beam report message.
  • the first beam report message may carry the information of the Primary Beam Id without the information of the Secondary Beam Id; if the UE determines the main beam and the n auxiliary in step 404 For the beam, the first beam report message may carry information of a Primary beam Id and n Secondary Beam Ids.
  • the UE may also report physical cell indentation (PCI) information corresponding to the primary beam and/or the secondary beam to the base station.
  • PCI physical cell indentation
  • the first beam report message may also carry the PCI information corresponding to the main beam; when the UE determines the main beam and the n auxiliary beams, the first beam report message may also carry the main beam corresponding PCI information, and PCI information corresponding to the n auxiliary beams.
  • PCI physical cell indentation
  • the UE may combine the PSS and the SSS according to the PSS and the SSS on the corresponding beam to represent the PCI information.
  • the UE may also report, to the base station, CSI-RS port information corresponding to the primary beam and/or the secondary beam, CSI measurement result, or CSI-RS based RRM measurement result.
  • the first beam report message may also carry CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result or CSI-RS based RRM measurement result; when the UE determines the main beam and n
  • the first beam report message may also carry the CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, the CSI measurement result or the CRM-RS based RRM measurement result, and the CSI-RS port information corresponding to the n auxiliary beams. , CSI measurement results or RRM measurement results based on CSI-RS.
  • the UE After obtaining the Beam Id, the UE performs CSI measurement according to the CSI-RS configuration information on the beam corresponding to the Beam Id or performs RRM measurement based on the CSI-RS, where the CSI-RS configuration information includes the CSI-RS port and the CSI-RS resource configuration.
  • the CSI-RS configuration information includes the CSI-RS port and the CSI-RS resource configuration.
  • CSI-RS port can belong to different millimeter wave small base stations.
  • the UE may also be divided into multiple messages for feedback.
  • the embodiments of the invention are not limited herein.
  • the embodiment of the present invention is described as an example in the first beam report message.
  • the UE may feed back in a variety of ways.
  • the UE may periodically feed back the first beam report message. Specifically, the UE may periodically detect and measure the result according to the detection and measurement period of the at least one beam, and perform feedback.
  • the UE can trigger feedback based on a pre-configured measurement threshold.
  • the first beam report message may be sent to the base station, where the first beam report message carries the Beam Id of the beam.
  • the signal quality of the beam may be the SINR or RSSI of the beam.
  • the UE may detect and measure the at least one beam according to the request sent by the base station, and feed back the detection and measurement result to the base station by using the first beam report message.
  • an uplink common channel such as a Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) may be used for feedback.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • IDLE idle state
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • MAC Media Access Control
  • CE Control Element
  • PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel
  • the UE may use the uplink dedicated time-frequency resource that is configured by the base station for the UE, and the time-frequency resource may be located in the millimeter wave cell or the low frequency cell aggregated by the UE.
  • the uplink dedicated time-frequency resource is specifically used for reporting the identity of the primary beam, when an abnormality occurs in the base station and/or the UE indication beam (the primary beam or the secondary beam), or after the base station and/or the UE detects the beam failure.
  • the reserved uplink dedicated time-frequency resource can be activated or enabled.
  • the base station sends downlink information to the UE by using a primary beam.
  • the base station After receiving the first beam report message of the UE, the base station determines the main beam according to the Primary Beam Id, and then transmits the downlink information on the main beam.
  • the base station may also determine the auxiliary beam.
  • the UE generates a receive beam and/or an uplink beam according to the main beam.
  • the UE generates a corresponding receive beam (Rx Beam) according to the main beam, and then receives downlink information on the Rx Beam.
  • the receiving end of the UE aligns the energy to the transmitting main beam by pre-weighting, and a higher receiving gain can be obtained.
  • the base station may pre-configure one or more received beam vector information corresponding to each Beam Id for the UE, and the UE according to one or more corresponding to the Primary Beam Id of the current main beam.
  • the receiving beam vector information generates one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam, and receives downlink information on one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the UE may also find a receiving beam that best matches the main beam according to the prior art beam training manner, and receive downlink information on the receiving beam.
  • the beam is trained to find the receiving beam that is the best match with the current main beam.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam may be used to transmit a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS).
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • the base station may pre-configure one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to each Beam Id for the UE, and the UE generates one or more corresponding to the primary beam according to the uplink beam vector information corresponding to the Primary Beam Id of the current main beam.
  • the uplink beams are then sent uplink information on one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the UE may find an uplink beam that best matches the current main beam according to the prior art beam training manner, and then send uplink information on the uplink beam. Similarly, the uplink beam that is the best match with the current main beam is found by the beam training.
  • the uplink beam that is the best match with the current main beam is found by the beam training.
  • the main beam and the at least one auxiliary beam are reported by the UE, so that when the main beam communication fails, it is possible to resume communication through the candidate beam (auxiliary beam), thereby improving communication reliability of the base station transmitting the downlink signal by using the beamforming mode. Sex.
  • the base station and the UE may perform communication only on the main beam, or may perform multi-beam communication through the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station is a millimeter-wave small base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam.
  • the UE acquires identifier information of the beam.
  • the UE acquires a signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE determines a primary beam.
  • the UE may determine the main beam according to the signal quality of each beam.
  • the UE may use the average of the signal qualities measured by the beam for a predetermined period of time as the signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE may determine a beam of the best beam quality in the predetermined time period t1 as a primary beam.
  • the UE and the base station may pre-appoint at least one secondary beam corresponding to each main beam, for example, the base station and the UE may agree to use a beam adjacent to the main beam as a secondary beam, and the like.
  • the base station may configure a corresponding at least one auxiliary beam for each beam, and send the configuration information to the UE.
  • the UE feeds back information about the main beam to the base station.
  • the UE may send information about the main beam of the beam report to the base station.
  • the UE may report related information of the main beam to the base station by using the first beam report message.
  • the first beam report message may carry information of the Primary Beam Id.
  • the first beam report message may further carry PCI information corresponding to the main beam.
  • the first beam report message may further carry CSI-RS port information, CSI measurement result or CSI-RS based RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the first beam report message may further carry the PCI information corresponding to the auxiliary beam of the main beam, and/or the first beam report message may also carry the CSI-RS port information corresponding to the auxiliary beam of the main beam, and the CSI. Measurement results or RRM measurement results based on CSI-RS, and so on.
  • the manner in which the first beam report message is sent may be similar to step 405 of FIG.
  • the UE may use the uplink dedicated time-frequency resource that is configured by the base station for the UE, and the time-frequency resource may be located in the millimeter wave cell or the low-frequency cell aggregated by the UE.
  • the base station sends downlink information to the UE by using a primary beam.
  • the UE generates a receive beam and/or an uplink beam according to the main beam.
  • the processing and complexity of the UE are simplified by pre-configuring the secondary beam of the primary beam (or pre-configuring the rule for determining the secondary beam according to the primary beam).
  • the base station and the UE may perform communication only on the main beam, or may perform multi-beam communication through the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 6 is a millimeter wave small base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam.
  • the UE acquires identifier information of the beam.
  • the UE acquires a signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE determines a primary beam.
  • the UE may determine the main beam according to the signal quality of each beam.
  • the UE may use the average of the signal qualities measured by the beam for a predetermined period of time as the signal quality of the beam. Specifically, the UE may determine that the Beam with the best signal quality in the predetermined time period t1 is a Primary Beam.
  • the UE feeds back information about the main beam to the base station.
  • step 605 For a specific implementation of the step 605, reference may be made to the related description of the step 505 of FIG. 5, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station sends downlink information to the UE by using a primary beam.
  • the base station After receiving the report message of the UE, the base station determines the main beam according to the Primary Beam Id, and then transmits the downlink information on the main beam.
  • the UE generates a receive beam and/or an uplink beam according to the main beam.
  • step 607 For the specific implementation of the step 607, reference may be made to the related description of the step 407 of FIG. 4, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station determines the secondary beam.
  • the base station may determine the secondary beam according to the signal quality of the uplink SRS sent by the UE.
  • the base station first acquires the signal quality of the uplink SRS of the uplink beam corresponding to each beam of the UE, and then selects several uplink beams with the best signal quality, and sets the corresponding downlink beam (excluding the main beam) as the auxiliary beam.
  • the UE may transmit the SRS in a beam manner or the SRS in an omni manner.
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the uplink beam (except the main beam) It can be used as a secondary beam used by the base station to transmit downlink signals to the UE.
  • the number of beams that can be used as the secondary beam is greater than the secondary beam maximum value N specified by the base station, the best N are selected as the secondary beams.
  • the UE only needs to report one best beam, and the auxiliary beam is maintained by the base station according to the signal quality of the uplink beam, thereby simplifying the processing and complexity of the UE.
  • the base station and the UE may perform communication only on the main beam, or may perform multi-beam communication through the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 7 is a millimeter wave small base station or a primary base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station broadcasts configuration information of the high frequency cell in the low frequency cell.
  • the base station broadcasts configuration information of the high frequency cell, such as frequency point information, bandwidth, and the like, in the low frequency cell.
  • the base station can set the coverage of the low frequency cell of the co-station to be the same as the coverage of the high frequency cell.
  • the UE determines, according to the high frequency cell configuration information, whether to enter the high frequency cell.
  • the UE obtains the configuration information of the high frequency cell from the low frequency cell, and further determines whether the UE enters the coverage of the high frequency cell according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell.
  • the UE may send a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell.
  • the base station determines, according to the discovery signal, at least one beam in a direction in which the UE is located.
  • the base station may determine the beam position where the UE is located according to the discovery signal of the UE, and determine at least one beam in the direction of the location of the UE, where the at least one beam is a downlink beam.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam in the direction of the location according to the location direction of the UE.
  • the process flow after the base station sends the beam indication signal may refer to FIG. 4-6, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station sends a downlink signal to the beam in the azimuth of the UE according to the discovery signal that the UE enters the high frequency cell, which is beneficial to the fast access of the UE, and can also save the base station that provides the high frequency cell. .
  • the UE When the UE communicates with the base station, there may be multiple situations in which the main beam communication between the UE and the base station is abnormal. For example, when the UE moves, the UE may not be followed by the initially reported beam direction. If the communication continues to use the original beam, communication will fail; or when the UE moves, it may encounter obstacles, causing the current working beam (such as line of sight) to suddenly attenuate, resulting in the current beam being unavailable. (not available); or, moving the obstacle causes the UE's current working beam (such as the line of sight (LOS)) to burst abruptly, resulting in the current beam not available, and so on.
  • the current working beam such as line of sight
  • LOS line of sight
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a main beam communication failure according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station transmits a signal to UE1 on beam 1 and a signal to UE2 on beam 4.
  • the UE is not in the initially reported beam direction due to UE mobility, for example, UE2 is not in the beam direction of beam 4.
  • the current working beam (such as the line of sight diameter) is suddenly attenuated due to the UE moving to encounter an obstacle or moving the obstacle, resulting in the current beam being unavailable (not available), for example, Beam 1 corresponding to UE1 is unavailable, beam 4 corresponding to UE2 is unavailable, and so on. Therefore, there is a need for an effective means to quickly detect and restore communication of the main beam.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information after an abnormality of a main beam according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE performs carrier aggregation by using multiple mmWave cells of the same frequency as the same SCell or multiple mmWave cells of different frequencies.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 9 is a millimeter wave small base station or a primary base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the UE determines whether an abnormality occurs in the current main beam.
  • the UE can determine whether the current main beam is abnormal in various ways.
  • the current main beam is considered to be abnormal.
  • the signal quality detected by the UE on the current main beam may be SINR, RSSI, RSRP or RSRQ of the main beam.
  • the current main beam is considered to be abnormal. Specifically, it may be provided that if the UE does not detect the downlink signal on the current main beam within the predetermined time period t4, then the current main beam may be considered to be abnormal.
  • the predetermined time period t4 may be set by the UE, or pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the UE reports abnormal information of the main beam.
  • the UE may also send a report to the base station indicating that the current main beam is faulty.
  • the base station may configure two different SRS resources (SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2) for the UE, and specify that the UE sends the SRS according to the SRS resource 1 when the current main beam works normally, and the UE when the current main beam works abnormally
  • the SRS is transmitted in accordance with SRS resource 2.
  • the SRS is sent according to the SRS resource 2, and is used by the base station to determine that the main beam of the UE originally reported a problem.
  • the UE may report the current main beam abnormality to the base station through the auxiliary beam.
  • the UE and the base station may sequentially use one or more of the beams to perform communication according to the order of the signal quality of the secondary beams from high to low.
  • the UE may send a main beam abnormality indication information to the base station to indicate that the main beam is abnormal, or send the current signal quality information of the main beam to the base station.
  • the UE may report the current main beam abnormality to the base station through the low frequency cell. Specifically, the UE may send a main beam abnormality indication information to the base station to indicate that the main beam is abnormal, or send the current signal quality information of the main beam to the base station.
  • the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station After receiving the main beam indication information of the UE, the base station may determine that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the UE sends the SRS according to the SRS resource 1, and when the current primary beam works abnormally, the UE sends the SRS according to the SRS resource 2, and when the SRS resource 2 receives the SRS, the primary beam can be determined. An exception occurs.
  • the base station may retransmit the beam indication signal carrying the beam identifier to the UE, and reselect the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station may retransmit the beam indication signal carrying the beam identifier to the UE, and reselect the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station may perform a method of re-determining the main beam after the main beam fails in advance with the UE, and wait for the UE to transmit a new main beam.
  • the UE reports the change information of the main beam.
  • the UE may periodically report the change information of the main beam.
  • the UE may measure the signal quality of the primary beam and the secondary beam according to the current period of the primary beam, thereby determining whether the primary beam is changed.
  • the UE may use the average value of the signal quality measured by the beam within a predetermined time period as the letter of the beam No. Quality.
  • the UE may use the first beam as the new main beam.
  • the original main beam is used as a secondary beam, and the new Primary Beam Id and Secondary Beam Id are reported to the base station.
  • the values of the thresholds Y4 and Y5 may be the same or different. Further, in particular, t6 may take a value of zero. When t6 takes a value of 0, Y4 and Y5 take an instantaneous value, that is, when the signal quality of the main beam is less than Y4, and the signal quality of the first beam in the auxiliary beam is greater than Y5, the UE can use the first beam as the first beam.
  • the new main beam uses the original main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the new main beam and the identification information of the original main beam can be sent to the base station.
  • the base station switches the main beam.
  • the base station performs handover of the main beam according to the change information of the main beam transmitted by the UE.
  • the base station in FIG. 9 is a millimeter-wave small base station, and the new main beam and the old main beam belong to the same millimeter-wave small base station, the base station can directly update the main beam, and A downlink message is sent to the UE on the new primary beam.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 9 is a millimeter wave small base station (first base station), and the new main beam belongs to a neighboring base station of the millimeter wave small base station to which the old main beam belongs (first The second base station may send an indication message to the second base station to instruct the second base station to communicate with the UE on the new primary beam.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 9 is the primary base station (third base station) to which the millimeter wave small base station (first base station) of the original main beam belongs, and the new main beam belongs to the old
  • the primary beam belongs to the neighboring base station (second base station) of the millimeter-wave small base station
  • the third base station may send an indication message to the second base station, indicating that the second base station communicates with the UE on the new primary beam.
  • the abnormal information of the main beam may not be reported, but the change information of the main beam is directly reported.
  • the candidate beam when the main beam fails, the candidate beam can be used to quickly resume communication, and the communication reliability of the downlink signal sent by the beamforming mode is improved.
  • the downlink signal may be a common signal, or a traffic signal, and the like.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information after a main beam abnormality according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE uses multiple mmWave cells of the same frequency as the same SCell or Carrier aggregation is performed on multiple mmWave cells of different frequencies.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 10 is a millimeter-wave small base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station determines whether an abnormality occurs in the current main beam.
  • the base station can also determine whether the current main beam is abnormal in various ways.
  • the base station does not detect the SRS of the UE on the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam reported by the UE, the main beam reported by the UE is abnormal. Specifically, it may be provided that if the base station fails to detect the SRS of the UE on the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam reported by the UE within the predetermined time period t5, the current main beam may be considered to be abnormal.
  • t5 may be set by the base station, or pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the main beam reported by the UE is considered to be abnormal.
  • the signal quality of the uplink beam detected by the base station at a certain moment is less than Y3, the current main beam may be considered to be abnormal; or, if the base station detects the uplink beam within the predetermined time period t5, If the signal quality is less than Y3, the current main beam will be considered abnormal.
  • t5 and Y3 may be set by the base station, or pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the base station may retransmit the beam indication signal carrying the beam identifier to the UE, and reselect the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station may retransmit the beam indication signal carrying the beam identifier to the UE, and reselect the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the indication information may be sent to the UE, indicating that the UE sends the identifier of the new main beam, that is, step 1002 is performed.
  • the base station instructs the UE to report a new main beam.
  • the base station may send an indication message to the UE to instruct the UE to report a new main beam.
  • the UE reports the change information of the main beam.
  • step 1003 For the specific implementation of the step 1003, reference may be made to the step 904 of FIG. 9 , which is not described herein again.
  • the base station determines a main beam.
  • the base station performs handover of the main beam according to the change information of the main beam transmitted by the UE.
  • the base station directly updates the primary beam and transmits a downlink message to the UE on the new primary beam.
  • the base station may go to the second The base station sends an indication message instructing the second base station to communicate with the UE on the new primary beam.
  • the candidate beam when the main beam fails, the candidate beam can be used to quickly resume communication, and the communication reliability of the downlink signal sent by the beamforming mode is improved.
  • the downlink signal may be a common signal, or a traffic signal, and the like.
  • FIG. 11 is an interaction flowchart of a secondary beam change according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE may determine the current auxiliary beam change information according to the signal quality of the current secondary beam.
  • the signal quality of the beams other than the current secondary beam set is measured.
  • the signal quality of the third beam in the other beams is greater than the predetermined threshold Y7, and the above-described condition lasts for a predetermined time period t7, the third beam is replaced with the second beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • Y6-Y7 may be the same or different.
  • Y6 and Y7 may take an instantaneous value, that is, if the second beam whose signal quality is the worst in the current secondary beam is smaller than Y6, and the main beam and the auxiliary If the signal quality of the third beam in the beams other than the beam is greater than Y7, the third beam is replaced by the second beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the change information of the auxiliary beam can be sent to the base station.
  • the base station updates the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station determines a new secondary beam according to the change information of the secondary beam sent by the UE.
  • the UE reports the identification information of the second beam and the third beam to the base station, and the base station may determine the auxiliary beam change and update the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station may update the list for recording the secondary beam, delete the identification information of the second beam in the list, and increase the identification information of the third beam.
  • FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the interaction of transmitting information after both the main beam and the auxiliary beam fail in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station may configure the identifier information of the at least one candidate beam for the UE in advance, and is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are invalid.
  • the base station and/or the UE determine whether the primary beam and the secondary beam are invalid.
  • the base station or the UE may determine whether the primary beam and the secondary beam are invalid, that is, whether the primary beam and the secondary beam are abnormal.
  • the specific implementation of the UE determining whether the main beam is invalid may refer to step 901 in FIG.
  • the base station may refer to step 903 of FIG. 9 or the related description in step 1001 of FIG. 10; for specific implementation of determining whether the secondary beam is invalid, refer to the correlation in step 1101 of FIG. Recorded.
  • the process of determining whether the secondary beam is invalid by the base station is similar to the process of determining whether the primary beam is invalid by the base station, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station and the UE communicate using candidate beams.
  • the base station and/or the UE determines that both the primary beam and all the secondary beams are invalid, the base station and the UE attempt downlink communication on the beam corresponding to the at least one candidate beam identifier.
  • a new beam training procedure can be triggered.
  • NLOS non-line of sight
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of an interaction method of uplink beam transmission information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE determines at least one uplink beam according to the main beam.
  • the UE After determining the main beam, the UE can perform uplink beam training according to the main beam.
  • the UE may determine at least one uplink beam in the direction of the primary beam for transmitting an uplink SRS (or an uplink discovery signal).
  • the UE sends an uplink SRS on at least one uplink beam.
  • the UE transmits multiple uplink SRSs of different beam directions in the direction of the current main beam.
  • the base station determines an uplink main beam according to the uplink SRS.
  • the base station determines, according to the multiple uplink beam SRS measurement results, that one uplink beam with the best signal quality is the uplink main beam of the UE.
  • the base station sends uplink main beam identification information.
  • the base station may send the uplink main beam identification information to the UE.
  • the UE sends uplink information by using an uplink main beam.
  • the UE sends uplink information in the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • an uplink beam with better signal quality can be obtained, which is beneficial to the uplink transmission of the UE.
  • FIG. 14 is a flow chart of another method of transmitting information in an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of Figure 14 is performed by a base station. It should be understood that the base station mentioned in the embodiment of the present invention is a millimeter wave small base station.
  • the method includes:
  • At least one beam of the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam.
  • the beam indication signal comprises at least one of the following: a cell discovery signal, a primary synchronization signal, a secondary synchronization signal, a broadcast channel signal, a cell reference signal, a channel state reference signal, and a signal dedicated to indicating beam identification.
  • the base station receives a first beam report message that is sent by the UE, where the first beam report message carries identifier information of the main beam, where the main beam is determined by the UE according to a signal quality of the at least one beam.
  • the base station determines the main beam according to the first beam report message.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the at least one beam, and determines that the base station sends the downlink to the UE according to the signal quality of the at least one beam fed back by the UE side.
  • the main beam used by the signal is beneficial to improve the communication quality of the base station when performing downlink communication.
  • the method further includes: detecting, by the base station, an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; if the base station does not detect the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam When the signal is measured, the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: detecting, by the base station, an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; if the base station detects that the UE is in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, When the measured signal quality is less than the first predetermined threshold, the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station determines whether the main beam is abnormal by detecting the signal of the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam.
  • the method further includes: if the base station receives the SRS sent by the UE on the second SRS resource, determining that the main beam is abnormal, where the base station configures the first The SRS resource and the second SRS resource, and instruct the UE to send an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and send the SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the base station determines the working state of the main beam according to the SRS resource used when the UE sends the RSR signaling, which can save the overhead of signaling transmission.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the base station, second beam report information sent by the UE, where the second beam report information indicates that the main beam work is abnormal.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one type of information: a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam, a CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, a CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and the main beam. Corresponding RRM measurement results.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the UE, an uplink time-frequency resource of the first beam report message, where the base station is configured for the UE.
  • the method further includes: the base station pre-configuring corresponding one or more receive beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE.
  • the method further includes: the base station pre-configuring corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the base station, at least one secondary beam of the primary beam according to the first beam report message, where the first beam report message further carries at least one of the primary beams Identification information of the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further includes: acquiring, by the base station, a signal quality of an uplink SRS sent by the UE on an uplink beam corresponding to a beam other than the main beam in the at least one beam; the base station in the at least one At least one beam with better signal quality of the uplink SRS is selected as a secondary beam of the main beam.
  • the method further includes: the base station transmitting the identifier information of the at least one beam to the UE on the low frequency cell, so that the UE searches for the beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, And receiving downlink information on a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam; the base station transmitting downlink information on one or more beams of the at least one beam.
  • the base station pre-configures at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and the UE correspond to the main beam when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are disabled.
  • the beam represented by the at least one candidate beam identifier performs downlink communication.
  • the method before the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, the method further includes: receiving, by the base station, a discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell; the base station according to the UE The discovery signal determines a location direction of the UE; the base station determines the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, wherein the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • FIG. 14 For a specific implementation of the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 14 , reference may be made to FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 . The method performed by the base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 13 is not described herein again.
  • FIG. 15 is a flow chart of another method of transmitting information in an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of Figure 15 is performed by a UE.
  • the method includes:
  • the UE receives a beam indication signal on at least one beam sent by the base station, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam.
  • the base station is a millimeter wave small base station, or a base station where a higher frequency cell above 3 GHz is located.
  • the UE determines, according to the beam indication signal on the at least one beam, identification information of the at least one beam.
  • the UE obtains the identification information of the beam by analyzing the beam indication signal on the beam.
  • the UE acquires signal quality information of the at least one beam.
  • the UE obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by measuring the signal on the at least one beam.
  • the UE sends a first beam report message to the base station, where the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam.
  • the UE receives the identity information of the primary beam sent by the base station, and determines a primary beam according to the identification information of the primary beam, where the primary beam is determined by the base station according to signal quality information of the at least one beam.
  • the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal on the at least one beam sent by the base station is used to obtain the signal quality of the at least one beam and sent to the base station, so that the base station determines the downlink signal used by the base station to send the downlink signal to the UE.
  • the main beam is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the first beam report message includes at least one of the following information: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam. Further, the first beam report message may further carry a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality on the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, the UE determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: if the UE does not detect the downlink signal on the primary beam within the second predetermined time period, the UE determines that the primary beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: the UE sending a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: the UE sending an SRS to the base station on the second SRS resource, where the base station configures the first The SRS resource and the second SRS resource, and instruct the UE to send an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and send the SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the UE, beam receiving indication information sent by the base station on the low frequency cell, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the UE is in the high frequency cell at least Receiving a downlink signal on one beam; the UE receiving a downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the UE acquiring a signal quality of at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the UE adopting a beam with the best signal quality as a new one The main beam is fed back to the base station.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • the method further includes: the UE generating one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the main beam and one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam, and The one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam receive the downlink information of the base station, where the one or more receiving beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the method further includes: the UE generates one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam according to the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam and the main beam, and the corresponding one of the main beams
  • the uplink information is sent to the base station on the uplink beam, and the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the base station, one or more uplink beams, an uplink SRS, so that the base station determines, according to the measurement result of the one or more uplink SRSs corresponding to the main beam, an uplink master of the UE.
  • the UE receives the uplink main beam identification information sent by the base station; the UE sends an uplink signal on the uplink main beam indicated by the uplink main beam identification information.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the method further includes: the UE according to the first beam report The message identifies the at least one secondary beam, wherein the first beam report message further carries identification information of the at least one secondary beam.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality of the primary beam is less than a second predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first secondary beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the foregoing duration The greater than the third predetermined time period, the UE sends the identification information of the primary beam and the first secondary beam and the corresponding channel quality to the base station.
  • the method further includes: if the UE detects that the signal quality of the second secondary beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and the foregoing continues The time is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, and the UE sends the identifier information of the first beam and the second secondary beam and the corresponding channel quality to the base station.
  • the method further includes: if the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the UE are both less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the UE Attempting to communicate with the base station on a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier, wherein the candidate beam identifier corresponding beam is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are both disabled.
  • the method further includes: if the current main beam of the UE is abnormal, the UE selects a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier as a main beam, where the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used as the main beam. Used when it is invalid.
  • the method further includes: when the UE enters the high frequency cell, the UE sends a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell. So that the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE on at least one beam of the location of the discovery signal of the UE.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station is a millimeter-wave small base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam.
  • the UE acquires identifier information of the beam.
  • the UE acquires a channel quality of the beam.
  • the channel quality of the UE feedback beam is the channel quality of the UE feedback beam.
  • the UE may feed back the channel quality of the at least one beam to the base station.
  • the UE may feed back, to the base station, channel qualities of the plurality of beams with better channel quality in the at least one beam.
  • the information fed back by the UE may include a beam identifier and a corresponding channel quality.
  • the base station determines a primary beam and/or a secondary beam.
  • the base station determines the beam with the best channel quality as the main beam according to the channel quality of the beam fed back by the UE.
  • the base station may configure a corresponding secondary beam of the primary beam identifier for the UE in advance. For example, the base station and the UE may agree to use a beam adjacent to the primary beam as a secondary beam, and the like.
  • the base station may select, from the beams fed back by the UE, a plurality of beams with the best channel quality, where the optimal one is the main beam and the others are the auxiliary beams.
  • the base station sends identification information of the primary beam and/or the secondary beam.
  • the identification information of the primary beam and/or the secondary beam may be sent to the UE.
  • the base station may be sent to the UE by using dedicated signaling, which may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) signaling.
  • dedicated signaling which may be RRC signaling or MAC CE signaling or Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) signaling.
  • the base station sends downlink information to the UE by using a primary beam.
  • the base station After determining the main beam, the base station can transmit downlink information through the main beam.
  • the UE generates a receive beam and/or an uplink beam according to the main beam.
  • step 1608 For the specific implementation of the step 1608, reference may be made to the step 407 of FIG. 4, which is not described herein again.
  • the base station determines the main beam and the at least one auxiliary beam by using the signal quality of the beam reported by the UE, so that when the main beam communication fails, it is possible to resume communication through the candidate beam (auxiliary beam), thereby improving the base station through the beam assignment.
  • the communication reliability of the downlink signal is transmitted in a form.
  • the UE when the UE enters between the beam cluster cycles of the two beam indication signals of the base station, the UE cannot find the high frequency cell for fast access, which is disadvantageous for the low latency service. .
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information after a main beam abnormality according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE uses multiple mmWave cells of the same frequency as the same SCell or Carrier aggregation is performed on multiple mmWave cells of different frequencies.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 17 is a millimeter wave small base station or a primary base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the UE determines whether an abnormality occurs in the current main beam.
  • the UE can determine whether the current main beam is abnormal in various ways.
  • the current main beam is considered to be abnormal.
  • the signal quality detected by the UE on the current main beam may be SINR, RSSI, RSRP or RSRQ of the main beam.
  • the current main beam is considered to be abnormal. Specifically, it may be provided that if the UE does not detect the downlink signal on the current main beam within the predetermined time period t4, then the current main beam may be considered to be abnormal.
  • the predetermined time period t4 may be set by the UE, or pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the UE reports abnormal information of the main beam.
  • the UE may also send a report to the base station indicating that the current main beam is faulty.
  • the base station may configure two different SRS resources (SRS resource 1 and SRS resource 2) for the UE, and specify that the UE sends the SRS according to the SRS resource 1 when the current main beam works normally, and the UE when the current main beam works abnormally
  • the SRS is transmitted in accordance with SRS resource 2.
  • the SRS is sent according to the SRS resource 2, and is used by the base station to determine that the main beam of the UE originally reported a problem.
  • the UE may report the current main beam abnormality to the base station through the auxiliary beam.
  • the UE and the base station may sequentially use one or more of the beams to perform communication according to the order of the signal quality of the secondary beams from high to low.
  • the UE may send a main beam abnormality indication information to the base station to indicate that the main beam is abnormal, or send the current signal quality information of the main beam to the base station.
  • the UE may report the current main beam abnormality to the base station through the low frequency cell. Specifically, the UE may send a main beam abnormality indication information to the base station, and is used to indicate the main The beam is abnormal or the current signal quality information of the main beam is sent to the base station.
  • the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station After receiving the main beam indication information of the UE, the base station may determine that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the UE sends the SRS according to the SRS resource 1, and when the current primary beam works abnormally, the UE sends the SRS according to the SRS resource 2, and when the SRS resource 2 receives the SRS, the primary beam can be determined. An exception occurs.
  • the base station may retransmit the beam indication signal carrying the beam identifier to the UE, and reselect the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station may retransmit the beam indication signal carrying the beam identifier to the UE, and reselect the main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station may wait for the UE to report the current best quality beams and their signal quality, that is, perform step 1704.
  • the UE reports signal quality information of the beam.
  • the UE may use the average of the signal qualities measured by the beam for a predetermined period of time as the signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE may
  • the beam and the signal quality of the main beam are reported to the base station so that the base station determines the new primary and secondary beams.
  • the UE may send the plurality of beams with the best signal quality and the signal quality thereof to the base station, so that The base station determines new primary and secondary beams.
  • the base station determines a primary beam and/or a secondary beam.
  • the base station can re-determine the new main beam according to the signal quality of the beam reported by the UE.
  • the base station may determine that the first beam is the primary beam.
  • the auxiliary beam is determined according to the corresponding rule of the main beam and the auxiliary beam; or the base station determines that the original main beam is the auxiliary beam, and the remaining auxiliary beams remain unchanged.
  • the base station can determine that one beam with the best signal quality is the main beam.
  • the auxiliary beam is determined according to the corresponding rule of the main beam and the auxiliary beam; or the base station determines that the remaining signal quality is better.
  • the dry beam is used as a secondary beam.
  • the base station sends identification information of the primary beam and/or the secondary beam.
  • the identity information of the primary beam and/or the secondary beam may be sent to the UE.
  • the base station switches the main beam.
  • the main beam can be switched.
  • step 905 of FIG. 9 which is not described herein again.
  • the abnormal information of the main beam may not be reported, but the change information of the main beam is directly reported.
  • the candidate beam when the main beam fails, the candidate beam can be used to quickly resume communication, and the communication reliability of the downlink signal sent by the beamforming mode is improved.
  • the downlink signal may be a common signal, or a traffic signal, and the like.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart of an interaction method for transmitting information after an abnormality of a main beam according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the UE performs carrier aggregation by using multiple mmWave cells of the same frequency as the same SCell or multiple mmWave cells of different frequencies.
  • the base station shown in FIG. 18 is a millimeter-wave small base station in LTE carrier aggregation.
  • the base station determines whether an abnormality occurs in the current main beam.
  • the base station can also determine whether the current main beam is abnormal in various ways.
  • the base station does not detect the SRS of the UE on the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam reported by the UE, the main beam reported by the UE is abnormal. Specifically, it may be provided that if the base station fails to detect the SRS of the UE on the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam reported by the UE within the predetermined time period t5, the current main beam may be considered to be abnormal.
  • t5 may be set by the base station, or pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the main beam reported by the UE is considered to be abnormal.
  • the signal quality of the uplink beam detected by the base station at a certain moment is less than Y3, the current main beam may be considered to be abnormal; or, if the base station detects the uplink beam within the predetermined time period t5, If the signal quality is less than Y3, the current main beam will be considered abnormal.
  • t5 and Y3 may be set by the base station, or pre-defined by the base station and the UE, or specified by the protocol.
  • the base station may retransmit the carrying beam identifier.
  • the beam indication signal is sent to the UE, and the main beam and the auxiliary beam are reselected.
  • the indication information may be sent to the UE to indicate the signal quality of the beam to the UE, that is, step 1802 is performed.
  • the base station indicates a signal quality of the reported beam of the UE.
  • the base station may send an indication message to the UE, instructing the UE to report the signal quality of the current beam.
  • the UE reports signal quality information of the beam.
  • the UE may use the average of the signal qualities measured by the beam for a predetermined period of time as the signal quality of the beam.
  • the UE may send several beams with the best signal quality and their signal quality to the base station, so that the base station determines the new main beam and the auxiliary beam.
  • the UE may send all beams and their signal quality to the base station, so that the base station determines the new primary beam and the secondary beam.
  • the base station determines a primary beam and/or a secondary beam.
  • the base station can re-determine the new main beam according to the signal quality of the beam reported by the UE.
  • the auxiliary beam is determined according to the corresponding rule of the main beam and the auxiliary beam; or the base station determines the remaining beams with better signal quality as the auxiliary beam.
  • the base station sends identification information of the primary beam and/or the secondary beam.
  • the identity information of the primary beam and/or the secondary beam may be sent to the UE.
  • the base station switches the main beam.
  • the main beam can be switched.
  • step 905 of FIG. 9 which is not described herein again.
  • the candidate beam when the main beam fails, the candidate beam can be used to quickly resume communication, and the communication reliability of the downlink signal sent by the beamforming mode is improved.
  • the downlink signal may be a common signal, or a traffic signal, and the like.
  • FIG. 19 is a flow chart of another method of transmitting information in an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method of FIG. 19 is performed by a base station which is a millimeter wave small base station or a base station where a higher frequency cell above 3 GHz is located.
  • the method includes:
  • the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam.
  • the base station receives a first beam report message fed back by the UE, where the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam.
  • the base station determines, according to signal quality information of the at least one beam, a main beam used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE.
  • the base station sends the beam indication signal carrying the beam identification on the at least one beam, and determines the main beam used by the base station to send the downlink signal to the UE according to the signal quality of the at least one beam fed back by the UE, which is beneficial to the base station. Improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the method further includes: detecting, by the base station, an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; if the base station does not detect the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam When the signal is measured, the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: detecting, by the base station, an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; if the base station detects that the UE is in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, When the measured signal quality is less than the first predetermined threshold, the base station determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the method further includes: if the base station receives the SRS sent by the UE on the second SRS resource, determining that the main beam is abnormal, where the base station configures the first The SRS resource and the second SRS resource, and instruct the UE to send an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and send the SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the method further includes: receiving, by the base station, second beam report information sent by the UE, where the second beam report information indicates that the main beam work is abnormal.
  • the signal quality information is at least one of the following: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the UE, an uplink time-frequency resource of the first beam report message, where the base station is configured for the UE.
  • the method further includes: the base station is at least one of the UEs Each of the beams is pre-configured with one or more corresponding receive beam vector information.
  • the method further includes: the base station pre-configuring corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further includes: determining, by the base station, at least one secondary beam of the primary beam according to the first beam report message, where the first beam report message further carries at least one of the primary beams Identification information of the auxiliary beam.
  • the method further includes: acquiring, by the base station, a signal quality of an uplink SRS sent by the UE on an uplink beam corresponding to a beam other than the main beam in the at least one beam; the base station in the at least one At least one beam with better signal quality of the uplink SRS is selected as a secondary beam of the main beam.
  • the method further includes: the base station transmitting the identifier information of the at least one beam to the UE on the low frequency cell, so that the UE searches for the beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, And receiving downlink information on a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam; the base station transmitting downlink information on one or more beams of the at least one beam.
  • the base station pre-configures at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and the UE correspond to the main beam when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are disabled.
  • the beam represented by the at least one candidate beam identifier performs downlink communication.
  • the method before the base station sends a beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, the method further includes: receiving, by the base station, a discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell; the base station according to the UE The discovery signal determines a location direction of the UE; the base station determines the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, wherein the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of user equipment 2000 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • User equipment 2000 includes:
  • the receiving unit 2001 is configured to receive, by the base station, a beam indication signal on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam that is located therein;
  • the obtaining unit 2002 is configured to acquire the at least the beam indication signal on the at least one beam Identification information of a beam;
  • the obtaining unit 2002 is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam
  • a determining unit 2003 configured to determine, according to a signal quality of the at least one beam, a main beam used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the user equipment 2000;
  • the sending unit 2004 is configured to send a first beam report message to the base station, where the first beam report message carries the identifier information of the main beam.
  • the user equipment 2000 obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by using the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal of the at least one beam sent by the base station, and then determines, according to the signal quality of the at least one beam, the base station sends the signal to the UE.
  • the main beam used by the downlink signal is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one of the following: a physical cell identifier (PCI) corresponding to the main beam, a CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, and a CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, The RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • PCI physical cell identifier
  • the UE may also carry the measurement result of the PCI and the main beam in the first beam message.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to: if the signal quality detected on the main beam is less than the first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, determine that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to: if the downlink signal on the main beam is not detected within the second predetermined time period, determine that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to: when the main beam is abnormal, send a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the sending unit 2004 is further configured to: when the main beam is abnormal, send an SRS to the base station on the second SRS resource, where the base station configures the first SRS resource for the user equipment 2000. And the second SRS resource, and instructing the user equipment 2000 to send an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and send the SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the receiving unit 2001 is further configured to receive beam receiving indication information sent by the base station on the low frequency cell, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the user equipment 2000 is at least one of the high frequency cells.
  • the signal quality is also used to obtain the signal quality of the at least one beam of the high frequency cell.
  • the sending unit 2004 is further configured to feed back a beam with the best signal quality in the at least one beam of the high frequency cell to the base station as a new main beam.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE, or is pre-agreed by the base station and the UE, or is specified by a protocol.
  • the receiving unit 2001 is further configured to generate one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the main beam and one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam, and in the corresponding one of the main beams Receiving downlink information of the base station on multiple receiving beams, where one or more receiving beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit 2004 is further configured to generate one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam according to the primary beam and the one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam, and the one or the corresponding one of the main beams Uplink information is sent to the base station on the multiple uplink beams, where one or more uplink beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit 2004 is further configured to send an uplink SRS on the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, so that the base station determines the user according to the measurement result of the uplink SRS of the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to determine the at least one secondary beam according to the signal quality of the at least one beam, where the maximum number of the secondary beams is configured by the base station for the user equipment 2000. Or the base station and user equipment 2000 pre-agreed.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to: when the user equipment 2000 detects that the signal quality of the primary beam is less than a second predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first secondary beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and If the duration is greater than the third predetermined time period, the primary beam is used as the secondary beam, and the first secondary beam is used as the new primary beam; the sending unit 2004 is further configured to report the identifiers of the new primary beam and the secondary beam to the base station. information.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to: when the user equipment 2000 detects that the signal quality of the second secondary beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and If the duration is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, the first beam is used Transmitting the second auxiliary beam as the new secondary beam; the sending unit 2004 is further configured to send the identification information of the first beam and the secondary beam to the base station; wherein the first beam is in a beam of the user equipment 2000 The main beam and other beams than the auxiliary beam.
  • the sending unit 2004 is further configured to: when the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the user equipment 2000 are both less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period, the pre-configured candidate An attempt is made to communicate with the base station on a beam corresponding to the beam identifier, wherein the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are both disabled.
  • the determining unit 2003 is further configured to: when the current main beam of the user equipment 2000 is abnormal, select a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier as a main beam, where the candidate beam identifier corresponding to the beam is used as the main beam. Used when the beam fails.
  • the sending unit 2004 is further configured to: when the user equipment 2000 enters the high frequency cell, send a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell, so that the base station is in the user equipment 2000 according to the discovery signal of the user equipment 2000.
  • a beam indication signal is transmitted to the user equipment 2000 on at least one beam of the location in which the signal is found.
  • the user equipment 2000 can also perform the method of FIG. 2 and implement the functions of the UE in the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 to FIG.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station 2100 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station 2100 includes:
  • the sending unit 2101 is configured to send, to the UE, a beam indication signal on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam that is located therein;
  • the receiving unit 2102 is configured to receive a first beam report message that is sent by the UE, where the first beam report message carries identification information of a main beam in the at least one beam, where the main beam is used by the UE according to the at least one beam. Signal quality is determined;
  • a determining unit configured to determine the main beam according to the first beam report message.
  • the base station 2100 sends a beam indication signal to the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the at least one beam, and determines, according to the signal quality of the at least one beam, the UE sends the base station to the UE.
  • the main beam used by the downlink signal is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the base station 2100 further includes a detecting unit 2104, configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, where the determining unit 2103 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2104 is in the main beam If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected in the corresponding uplink beam, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • a detecting unit 2104 configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam
  • the determining unit 2103 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2104 is in the main beam If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected in the corresponding uplink beam, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station 2100 further includes a detecting unit 2104, configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, where the determining unit 2103 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2104 detects the And determining, by the UE, that the measured signal quality in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold, determining that the main beam is abnormal.
  • a detecting unit 2104 configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam
  • the determining unit 2103 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2104 detects the And determining, by the UE, that the measured signal quality in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold, determining that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the receiving unit 2102 is further configured to receive, by using the second SRS resource, the SRS sent by the UE.
  • the determining unit 2103 is further configured to receive, by the receiving unit 2102, the second SRS resource.
  • the SRS sent by the UE determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station configures the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource for the UE, and indicates that the UE sends the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally.
  • the SRS transmits the SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the receiving unit 2102 is further configured to receive second beam report information sent by the UE, where the second beam report information indicates that the main beam operation is abnormal.
  • the first beam report message further carries at least one type of information: a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam, a CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, a CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and the main beam. Corresponding RRM measurement results.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station for the UE.
  • the base station further includes a first configuration unit, configured to pre-configure corresponding one or more receive beam vector information for each of the at least one beam of the UE, and/or
  • the base station and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the determining unit 2103 is further configured to determine, according to the first beam report message, at least one secondary beam of the primary beam, where the first beam report message further carries at least one of the primary beams. Identification information of the auxiliary beam.
  • the detecting unit 2104 is further configured to acquire, according to the signal quality of the uplink SRS sent by the UE on the uplink beam corresponding to the beam other than the main beam in the at least one beam; the determining unit 2103 further uses At least one beam with better signal quality of the uplink SRS is selected as the auxiliary beam of the main beam in the at least one beam.
  • the sending unit 2101 is further configured to send the identifier information of the at least one beam to the UE on the low frequency cell, so that the UE searches for the beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, And receiving downlink information on a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam; the sending unit 2101 is further configured to send downlink information on one or more beams of the at least one beam.
  • the base station further includes a second configuration unit, configured to pre-configure at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station and The UE performs downlink communication by using a beam represented by at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • a second configuration unit configured to pre-configure at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station and The UE performs downlink communication by using a beam represented by at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the receiving unit 2102 before the sending unit 2101 sends a beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, the receiving unit 2102 is further configured to receive a discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell;
  • the 2103 is further configured to determine a location direction of the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE, and determine the at least one beam according to a location direction of the UE, where the at least one beam is located in a location direction of the UE.
  • the base station 2100 can also perform the method of FIG. 14 and implement the functions of the base station in the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 to FIG.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment 2200 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment 2200 includes:
  • the receiving unit 2201 is configured to receive, by the base station, a beam indication signal on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam that is located therein;
  • the acquiring unit 2202 is configured to acquire, according to the beam indication signal on the at least one beam, identification information of the at least one beam.
  • the acquiring unit 2202 is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam
  • the sending unit 2203 is configured to send, to the base station, a first beam report message, where the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam;
  • the receiving unit 2201 is further configured to receive main beam identification information sent by the base station;
  • the determining unit 2204 is configured to determine the main beam according to the main beam identification information.
  • the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal on the at least one beam sent by the base station is used to obtain the signal quality of the at least one beam and sent to the base station, so that the base station determines the downlink signal used by the base station to send the downlink signal to the UE.
  • the main beam is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the first beam report message includes at least one of the following information: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam. Further, the first beam report message may further carry a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the determining unit 2204 is further configured to: if the signal quality detected on the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold in the first predetermined time period, determine that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the determining unit 2204 is further configured to: if the downlink signal on the main beam is not detected within the second predetermined time period, determine that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: when the main beam is abnormal, send a second beam report message to the base station, where the beam report message is used to indicate that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: when the main beam is abnormal, send an SRS to the base station on the second SRS resource, where the base station configures the first SRS for the user equipment 2200.
  • the resource and the second SRS resource and instruct the user equipment 2200 to send an SRS from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally, and send the SRS from the second SRS resource when the main beam works abnormally.
  • the receiving unit 2201 is further configured to receive beam receiving indication information sent by the base station on the low frequency cell, where the beam receiving indication information indicates that the user equipment 2200 is in the high frequency cell.
  • Receiving a downlink signal on at least one beam the receiving unit 2201 is further configured to receive a downlink signal on at least one beam of the high frequency cell; the acquiring unit 2202 is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the at least one beam of the high frequency cell;
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to feed back the signal quality of the at least one beam to the base station.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource of the first beam report message sent by the user equipment 2200 is configured by the base station for the user equipment 2200.
  • the receiving unit 2201 is further configured to generate one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam according to the main beam and one or more received beam vector information corresponding to the main beam, and The one or more receiving beams corresponding to the main beam receive the downlink information of the base station, where the one or more receiving beam vector information corresponding to the main beam is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: according to the main beam and the corresponding one of the main beams Or the uplink beam vector information is used to generate one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, and send uplink information to the base station on one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, where the primary beam corresponds to one or A plurality of uplink beam vector information is pre-configured by the base station.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to send an uplink SRS on the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam, so that the base station determines, according to the measurement result of the uplink SRS of the one or more uplink beams corresponding to the main beam.
  • the base station and the user equipment 2200 pre-approve a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as auxiliary beams of the main beam.
  • the determining unit 2204 is further configured to determine the at least one secondary beam according to the first beam report message, where the first beam report message further carries identification information of the at least one secondary beam.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: when the user equipment 2200 detects that the signal quality of the primary beam is less than a second predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first secondary beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, and The foregoing duration is greater than the third predetermined time period, and the identification information of the primary beam and the first secondary beam and the corresponding channel quality are sent to the base station.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: when the user equipment 2200 detects that the signal quality of the second auxiliary beam is less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the signal quality of the first beam is greater than a third predetermined threshold, And if the duration is greater than the fourth predetermined time period, the identifier information of the first beam and the second secondary beam and the corresponding channel quality are sent to the base station.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: when the channel quality of the current primary beam and all the secondary beams of the user equipment 2200 are both less than a fourth predetermined threshold, and the foregoing duration is greater than the fifth predetermined time period. And attempting to communicate with the base station on the beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier, where the beam corresponding to the candidate beam identifier is used when the main beam and all the auxiliary beams are both disabled.
  • the determining unit 2204 is further configured to: when the current main beam of the user equipment 2200 is abnormal, select a beam corresponding to the pre-configured candidate beam identifier as a main beam, where the candidate beam identifier corresponding to the beam is used. Used when the main beam fails.
  • the sending unit 2203 is further configured to: when the user equipment 2200 enters the high frequency cell, send a discovery signal to the base station according to the configuration information of the high frequency cell, so that the base station is configured according to the user equipment.
  • the discovery signal of 2200 transmits a beam indication signal to user equipment 2200 on at least one beam of the location of the discovery signal of user equipment 2200.
  • the user equipment 2200 can also perform the method of FIG. 15 and implement the functions of the UE in the embodiments shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 18 and FIG. 7, FIG. 12, and FIG.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station 2300 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station 2300 includes:
  • the sending unit 2301 is configured to send a beam indication signal to the user equipment UE on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam that is located therein;
  • the receiving unit 2302 is configured to receive a first beam report message that is sent by the UE, where the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam;
  • the determining unit 2303 is configured to determine, according to the signal quality information of the at least one beam, a main beam used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE.
  • the base station 2300 sends the beam indication signal carrying the beam identification on the at least one beam, and determines the main beam used by the base station to send the downlink signal to the UE according to the signal quality of the at least one beam fed back by the UE. It is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the signal quality information is at least one of the following: CSI-RS port information corresponding to the main beam, CSI measurement result corresponding to the main beam, and RRM measurement result corresponding to the main beam.
  • the first beam report message further carries a physical cell identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the base station 2300 further includes: a detecting unit 2304, configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; and the determining unit 2303 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2304 is in the If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • a detecting unit 2304 configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam
  • the determining unit 2303 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2304 is in the If the measurement signal of the UE is not detected in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam, it is determined that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station 2300 further includes: a detecting unit 2304, configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam; and the determining unit 2303 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2304 detects And determining, by the UE, that the measured signal quality in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold, determining that the main beam is abnormal.
  • a detecting unit 2304 configured to detect an uplink signal of the UE in an uplink beam corresponding to the main beam
  • the determining unit 2303 is further configured to: if the detecting unit 2304 detects And determining, by the UE, that the measured signal quality in the uplink beam corresponding to the main beam is less than a first predetermined threshold, determining that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the receiving unit 2302 is further configured to receive, by using the second SRS resource, the SRS sent by the UE.
  • the determining unit 2303 is further configured to receive, by the receiving unit 2302, the second SRS resource.
  • the SRS sent by the UE determines that the main beam is abnormal.
  • the base station 2300 configures the first SRS resource and the second SRS resource for the UE, and indicates that the UE is from the first SRS resource when the main beam works normally. Send SRS, when the main beam works abnormally
  • the second SRS resource sends an SRS.
  • the receiving unit 2302 is further configured to receive second beam report information sent by the UE, where the second beam report information indicates that the main beam work is abnormal.
  • the uplink time-frequency resource that the UE sends the first beam report message is configured by the base station 2300 for the UE.
  • the base station 2300 further includes a first configuration unit, configured to:
  • Corresponding one or more uplink beam vector information is pre-configured for each of at least one of the beams of the UE.
  • the base station 2300 and the UE pre-arrange a plurality of beams adjacent to the main beam as the auxiliary beam.
  • the determining unit 2303 is further configured to: determine, according to the signal quality information of the at least one beam, at least one secondary beam of the primary beam.
  • the detecting unit 2304 is further configured to acquire a signal quality of the uplink SRS sent by the UE on an uplink beam corresponding to a beam other than the main beam in the at least one beam; the determining unit 2303 further uses At least one beam with better signal quality of the uplink SRS is selected as the auxiliary beam of the main beam in the at least one beam.
  • the sending unit 2301 is further configured to send the identifier information of the at least one beam to the UE on the low frequency cell, so that the UE searches for a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam on the high frequency cell, And receiving downlink information on a beam corresponding to the identifier of the at least one beam; the sending unit 2301 is further configured to send downlink information on one or more beams in the at least one beam.
  • the base station 2300 further includes a second configuration unit, configured to pre-configure at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station 2300 and the UE perform downlink communication by using a beam represented by at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • a second configuration unit configured to pre-configure at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to each main beam, where the base station and all the auxiliary beams fail, the base station 2300 and the UE perform downlink communication by using a beam represented by at least one candidate beam identifier corresponding to the main beam.
  • the receiving unit 2302 before the sending unit 2301 sends a beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, the receiving unit 2302 is further configured to receive a discovery signal that is sent when the UE enters the high frequency cell;
  • the 2303 is further configured to determine a location direction of the UE according to the discovery signal of the UE, and determine the at least one beam according to the location direction of the UE, where the At least one beam is located in the direction of the location of the UE.
  • the base station 2300 can also perform the method of FIG. 19 and implement the functions of the embodiment shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 18 and FIG. 7, FIG. 12, and FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a user equipment 2400 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • User equipment 2400 can include a processor 2402, a memory 2403, a transmitter 2401, and a receiver 2404.
  • the user device 2400 can be, etc.
  • Receiver 2404, transmitter 2401, processor 2402, and memory 2403 are interconnected by a bus 2406 system.
  • the bus 2406 can be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one double-headed arrow is shown in Figure 24, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • transmitter 2401 and receiver 2404 can be coupled to antenna 2405.
  • the memory 2403 is configured to store a program.
  • the program can include program code, the program code including computer operating instructions.
  • Memory 2403 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 2402.
  • the memory 2403 may include a high speed RAM memory and may also include a non-volatile memory such as at least one disk memory.
  • the processor 2402 executes the program stored in the memory 2403, and is specifically configured to perform the following operations:
  • the first beam report message is sent by the transmitter 2401 to the base station, where the first beam report message carries the identification information of the main beam.
  • the method performed by the user equipment disclosed in any of the embodiments of FIG. 2, FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 to FIG. 13 may be applied to the processor 2402 or implemented by the processor 2402.
  • the processor 2402 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the foregoing method may be through an integrated logic circuit or a software form of hardware in the processor 2402. The instructions are completed.
  • the processor 2402 may be a general-purpose processor, including a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP processor, etc.), or a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit. (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 2403, and the processor 2402 reads the information in the memory 2403 and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the user equipment 2400 obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by using the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal of the at least one beam sent by the base station, and then determines, according to the signal quality of the at least one beam, the base station sends the signal to the UE.
  • the main beam used by the downlink signal is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the user equipment 2400 can also perform the method of FIG. 2 through the processor 2402, the transmitter 2401, the receiver 2404, and the like, and implement the functions of the UE in the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 to FIG. The embodiments are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station 2500 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Base station 2500 can include a processor 2502, a memory 2503, a transmitter 2501, and a receiver 2504. In a particular application, the base station 2500 can be, etc.
  • Receiver 2504, transmitter 2501, processor 2502, and memory 2503 are interconnected by a bus 2506 system.
  • the bus 2506 can be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one double-headed arrow is shown in Figure 25, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • transmitter 2501 and receiver 2504 can be coupled to antenna 2505.
  • the memory 2503 is configured to store a program.
  • the program can include program code, the program code including computer operating instructions.
  • the memory 2503 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to the processor 2502.
  • the memory 2503 may include a high speed RAM memory, and may also include a non-volatile memory, such as at least one Disk storage.
  • the processor 2502 executes the program stored in the memory 2503, and is specifically configured to perform the following operations:
  • the transmitter 2501 Transmitting, by the transmitter 2501, the beam indication signal to the UE on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam that is located therein;
  • a first beam report message that is sent by the UE, where the first beam report message carries identification information of a main beam in the at least one beam, where the main beam is used by the UE according to signal quality of the at least one beam determine;
  • the main beam is determined according to the first beam report message.
  • the method performed by the base station disclosed in any of the embodiments of FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 to FIG. 14 of the present invention may be applied to the processor 2502 or implemented by the processor 2502.
  • the processor 2502 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the foregoing method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 2502 or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the processor 2502 may be a general-purpose processor, including a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP processor, etc.), or a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit.
  • ASIC application-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or carried out.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 2503, and the processor 2502 reads the information in the memory 2503 and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the base station 2500 transmits a beam indication signal on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the at least one beam, and determines that the base station sends the signal to the UE according to the signal quality of the at least one beam fed back by the UE side.
  • the main beam used by the downlink signal is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the base station 2500 can also perform the method of FIG. 14 through the processor 2502, the transmitter 2501, the receiver 2504, and the like, and implement the functions of the base station in the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 7 and FIG. 9 to FIG. The embodiments of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of user equipment 2600 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • User equipment 2600 can include a processor 2602, a memory 2603, a transmitter 2601, and a receiver 2604.
  • the user device 2600 can be, etc.
  • Bus 2606 can be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one double-headed arrow is shown in Figure 26, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • transmitter 2601 and receiver 2604 can be coupled to antenna 2605.
  • the memory 2603 is for storing a program.
  • the program can include program code, the program code including computer operating instructions.
  • the memory 2603 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to the processor 2602.
  • the memory 2603 may include a high speed RAM memory and may also include a non-volatile memory such as at least one disk memory.
  • the processor 2602 executes the program stored in the memory 2603, and is specifically configured to perform the following operations:
  • the main beam is determined according to the main beam identification information.
  • the method performed by the user equipment disclosed in any of the embodiments of FIG. 16 to FIG. 18 and FIG. 7 , FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 may be applied to the processor 2602 or implemented by the processor 2602.
  • the processor 2602 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 2602 or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the processor 2602 may be a general-purpose processor, including a central processing unit (CPU), and a network processor (Network Processor).
  • NP can also be digital signal processor (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented or carried out.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 2603, and the processor 2602 reads the information in the memory 2603, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with the hardware thereof.
  • the user equipment 2600 obtains the signal quality of the at least one beam by using the identifier information carried in the beam indication signal of the at least one beam sent by the base station, and sends the signal quality to the base station, so that the base station determines to send the downlink signal to the UE.
  • the main beam used is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the user equipment 2600 can also perform the method of FIG. 15 through the processor 2602, the transmitter 2601, the receiver 2604, and the like, and implement the functions of the UE in the embodiments shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 18 and FIG. 7, FIG. 12, and FIG.
  • the embodiments of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic structural diagram of a base station 2700 according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Base station 2700 can include a processor 2702, a memory 2703, a transmitter 2701, and a receiver 2704. In a particular application, the base station 2700 can be, etc.
  • Receiver 2704, transmitter 2701, processor 2702, and memory 2703 are interconnected by a bus 2706 system.
  • the bus 2706 can be an ISA bus, a PCI bus, or an EISA bus.
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of representation, only one double-headed arrow is shown in Figure 27, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • transmitter 2701 and receiver 2704 can be coupled to antenna 2705.
  • the memory 2703 is configured to store a program.
  • the program can include program code, the program code including computer operating instructions.
  • Memory 2703 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 2702.
  • the memory 2703 may include a high speed RAM memory and may also include a non-volatile memory such as at least one disk memory.
  • the processor 2702 executes the program stored in the memory 2703, and is specifically configured to perform the following operations. Make:
  • a beam indication signal to the user equipment UE on the at least one beam, where the beam indication signal carries the identification information of the beam that is located therein;
  • the receiver 2704 Receiving, by the receiver 2704, the first beam report message fed back by the UE, where the first beam report message carries signal quality information of the at least one beam;
  • the method performed by the base station disclosed in any of the embodiments of FIG. 16-19 and FIG. 7, FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 of the present invention may be applied to the processor 2702 or implemented by the processor 2702.
  • the processor 2702 may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 2702 or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the processor 2702 may be a general-purpose processor, including a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP Processor, etc.), or a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit. (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, discrete hardware component.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 2703, and the processor 2702 reads the information in the memory 2703 and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the base station 2700 sends a beam indication signal carrying a beam identifier on at least one beam, and determines a main beam used by the base station to send a downlink signal to the UE according to the signal quality of the at least one beam fed back by the UE. It is beneficial to improve the communication quality when the base station performs downlink communication.
  • the base station 2700 can also perform the method of FIG. 19 through the processor 2702, the transmitter 2701, the receiver 2704, and the like, and implement the functions of the base station in the embodiments shown in FIG. 16 to FIG. 18 and FIG. 7, FIG. 12, and FIG. The embodiments of the present invention are not described herein again.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product.
  • the technical solution of the present invention which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or a part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including
  • the instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), A variety of media that can store program code, such as random access memory (RAM), disk, or optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本发明实施例提供了一种传输信息的方法、用户设备和基站，该方法包括：UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；该UE根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号确定该至少一个波束的标识信息；该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；该UE向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该主波束的标识信息。本发明实施例中，通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，以及该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。

Description

传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备 技术领域
本发明涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备。
背景技术
随着分组业务和智能终端的迅速发展，高速、大数据量业务对频谱的需求不断增加。厘米波(Centimeter Wave)频段通常指3GHz～30GHz范围的频谱，毫米波频段通常指30GHz～300GHz范围的频谱，可以统称为毫米波。由于毫米波具有大量的可利用带宽，将成为5G通信和第三代移动通信伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project，3GPP)长期演进高级(Long Term Evolution Advanced，LTE-A)未来发展潜在的目标频谱。现有技术蜂窝通信如长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)一般利用2GHz左右或更低的频段，LTE-A小小区增强(Small Cell Enhancement)标准化项目正在研究和利用3.5GHz频段。电气电子工程师学会(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers，IEEE)的802.11ad标准将60GHz频段用于无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network，WLAN)，一般用于10米左右的短距离室内通信。
现有技术还没有将6GHz甚至更高频段用于蜂窝通信，毫米波高频段用于蜂窝通信的主要挑战在于该波段存在较大的自由空间衰减，另外空气吸收、雨、雾、建筑物或其他物体的吸收和散射等因素引起的衰减和非常严重。波束赋形(Beamforming)技术被认为是可以弥补毫米波显著路损(Pathloss)问题的潜在技术，大规模多入多出天线(Massive MIMO或Large Scale MIMO)系统被认为是在毫米波频段实现波束赋形技术的潜在方向。
IEEE的802.11ad标准支持波束赋形，在进行通信的两个节点间进行波束训练的过程大致为：节点1以波束方式分别向多个不同的方向发送训练信标(Beacon)，节点2以准全向(Quasi-omni)方式接收，识别最好的波束a；然后节点2以波束方式分别向多个不同的方向发送信标，节点1以准全向方式接收，识别最好的波束b；节点2向节点1报告最好的波束a以及节点2向节点1报告最好的波束b，从而发现最佳匹配波束对，后续按照该波束对的方向进行数据通信。但是，802.11ad一般用于室内短距离点对点通信，波 束训练过程较复杂，延迟较大，效率较低，不能直接应用于蜂窝移动通信系统。
而现有蜂窝通信处于低频段，小区的公共信号如同步信道(Synchronization Channel)、广播信道(Broadcast Channel)等一般使用全向发射方式，如果在毫米波高频段蜂窝通信系统，对于公共信号如果仍然使用全向发射的方式，将导致公共信号的发射范围有限，例如数十米，对基站的功率消耗和小区的覆盖与容量等都很不利。
发明内容
本发明实施例提供一种传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备，能够确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
第一方面，提供了一种传输信息的方法，该方法包括：UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；该UE根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号确定该至少一个波束的标识信息；该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；该UE向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该主波束的标识信息。
结合第一方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常；或者，如果该UE在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：当该主波束发生异常时，该UE向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常；或者，当该主波束发生异常时，该UE在第二SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息， 该波束接收指示信息指示该UE在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE在该高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该UE将信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给该基站。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定该UE的上行主波束；该UE接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该UE在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该辅波束的最大个数是该基站为该UE配置的，或该基站和该UE预先约定的。
结合第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第十种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则该UE将该主波束作为辅波束，将该第一辅波束作为新的主波束，并向该基站报告新的主波束和辅波束的标识信息。
结合第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第十种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则该UE用该第一波束替换该第二辅波束作为该新的辅波束，并将该第一波束和该第二辅波束的标识信息发送给该基站，其中，该第一波束为该UE的波束中该主波束及该辅波束以外的其它波束。
结合第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则该UE在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束发生异常时，则该UE选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束 标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十五种可能的实现方式中，在该UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：当该UE进入高频小区时，该UE根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据该UE的发现信号在该UE的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向该UE发送波束指示信号。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第十五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十六种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第二方面，提供了一种传输信息的方法，该方法包括：基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；该基站接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束中的主波束的标识信息，该主波束由该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定；该基站根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束。
结合第二方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；当该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常，或者，如果该基站检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第二方面，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：当该基站在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测 量结果。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息；和/或
该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该基站在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第九 种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该基站在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第十种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，在该基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该基站根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向；该基站根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第二方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第三方面，提供了一种传输信息的方法，该方法包括：UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；该UE根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少一个波束的标识信息；该UE获取该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；该UE向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；该UE接收该基站发送的主波束标识信息，并根据该主波束标识信息确定主波束。
结合第三方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常；或者如果该UE在第二预定时间段内检测 不到该主波束上的下行信号，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：当该主波束发生异常时，该UE向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常；或者当该主波束发生异常时，该UE在第二探测参考信号SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，该第一波束报告消息包括以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示该UE在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该UE将该至少一个波束的信号质量反馈给该基站。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中， 该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个的上行SRS的测量结果确定该UE的上行主波束；该UE接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该UE在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该UE根据该第一波束报告消息确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
结合第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第十种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则该UE将该主波束和该第一辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
结合第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第十种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则该UE将该第一波束和该第二辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
结合第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定 阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则该UE在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
结合第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束发生异常时，则该UE选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十五种可能的实现方式中，在该UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：当该UE进入高频小区时，该UE根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据该UE的发现信号在该UE的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向该UE发送波束指示信号。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第三方面的第十五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十六种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第四方面，提供了一种传输信息的方法，该方法包括：基站在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；该基站接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；该基站根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
结合第四方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；如果该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常，或者，如果该基站检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第四方面，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：如果该基站在SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波 束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第四方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该信号质量信息以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束对应的物理小区标识。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：
该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息；和/或
该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第七 种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该基站在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第十种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该基站在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该基站在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
结合第四方面的第八种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，该基站预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，在该基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该基站根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向；该基站根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第十三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第五方面，提供了一种用户设备，该用户设备包括：接收单元，用于接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；获取单元，用于根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少一个波束的标识信息；该获取单元还用于获取该至少一个波束的信号质量；确定单元，用于根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该基站向该用 户设备发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；发送单元，用于向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该主波束的标识信息。
结合第五方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：如果在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常；或者如果在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：当该主波束发生异常时，向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常；或者，当该主波束发生异常时，在第二探测参考信号SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为该用户设备配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该用户设备在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示该用户设备在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该接收单元还用于在该高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该获取单元还用于获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该发送单元还用于将该高频小区的至少一个波束中信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给该基站。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第五方面，在第五种可能的实现方式中，该用户设备发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该用户设备配置的。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向 量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于在该主波束对应的至少一个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该至少一个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定该UE的上行主波束；该接收单元还用于接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该发送单元还用于在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该用户设备预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该辅波束的最大个数是该基站为该用户设备配置的，或该基站和该用户设备预先约定的。
结合第五方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第十种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：当该用户设备检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则将该主波束作为辅波束，将该第一辅波束作为新的主波束；该发送单元还用于向该基站报告新的主波束和辅波束的标识信息。
结合第五方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第十种可能的实现方式，在第 十二种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于当该用户设备检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则用该第一波束替换该第二辅波束作为该新的辅波束；该发送单元还用于将该第一波束和该辅波束的标识信息发送给该基站；其中，该第一波束为该用户设备的波束中该主波束及该辅波束以外的其它波束。
结合第五方面的第九种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于：当该用户设备当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：当该用户设备当前的主波束发生异常时，则选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十五种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于：当该用户设备进入高频小区时，根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据该用户设备的发现信号在该用户设备的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向该用户设备发送波束指示信号。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第五方面的第十五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十六种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第六方面，提供了一种基站，该基站包括：发送单元，用于在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；接收单元，用于接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束中的主波束的标识信息，该主波束由 该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定；确定单元，用于根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束。
结合第六方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该基站还包括：检测单元，用于在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；该确定单元还用于如果该检测单元在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则确定该主波束发生异常，或者，如果该检测单元检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第六方面，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于在第二探测参考信号SRS资源上接收该UE发送的SRS；该确定单元还用于当该接收单元在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，该基站还包括第一配置单元，用于：
为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接 收波束向量信息；和/或
为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，该检测单元还用于获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该确定单元还用于在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第九种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该发送单元还用于在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第十种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该基站还包括第二配置单元，用于：预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式 中，在该发送单元在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该接收单元还用于接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该确定单元还用于根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向，并根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第六方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第七方面，提供了一种用户设备，该用户设备包括：接收单元，用于接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；获取单元，用于根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少一个波束的标识信息；该获取单元还用于获取该至少一个波束的信号质量；发送单元，用于向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；该接收单元还用于接收该基站发送的主波束标识信息；确定单元，用于根据该主波束标识信息确定主波束。
结合第七方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：如果在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常；或者如果在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于：当该主波束发生异常时，向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常；或者，当该主波束发生异常时，在第二SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为该用户设备配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该用户设备在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第七方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，该第一波束报告消息包括以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示该用户设备在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该接收单元还用于在该高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该获取单元还用于获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该发送单元还用于将该至少一个波束的信号质量反馈给该基站。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，该用户设备发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该用户设备配置的。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定该用户设备的上行主波束；该接收单元还用于接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该发送单元还用于在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第八 种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，该基站和该用户设备预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第八种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于根据该第一波束报告消息确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
结合第七方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第七方面的第十种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于当该用户设备检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则将该主波束和该第一辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
结合第七方面的第九种可能的实现方式或第七方面的第十种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于当该用户设备检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则将该第一波束和该第二辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
结合第七方面的第九种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于：当该用户设备当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
结合第七方面的第二种可能的实现方式或第七方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：当该用户设备当前的主波束发生异常时，则选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十五种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于：当该用户设备进入高频小区时，根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据该用户设备的发现信号在该 用户设备的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向该用户设备发送波束指示信号。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第十五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十六种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
第八方面，提供了一种基站，该基站包括：发送单元，用于在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；接收单元，用于接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；确定单元，用于根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
结合第八方面，在第一种可能的实现方式中，该基站还包括：检测单元，用于在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；该确定单元还用于如果该检测单元在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则确定该主波束发生异常，或者，如果该检测单元检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常。
结合第八方面，在第二种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于在第二SRS资源上接收该UE发送的SRS；该确定单元还用于当该接收单元在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
结合第八方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第三种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该信号质量信息以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
结合第八方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第四种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束对应的物理小区标识。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第四 种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第五种可能的实现方式中，该接收单元还用于接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第五种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第六种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第六种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第七种可能的实现方式中，该基站还包括第一配置单元，用于：
为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息；和/或
为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第八种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第九种可能的实现方式中，该确定单元还用于：根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第七种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十种可能的实现方式中，该检测单元还用于获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该确定单元还用于在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第十种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十一种可能的实现方式中，该发送单元还用于在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息， 以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该发送单元还用于在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
结合第八方面的第八种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十二种可能的实现方式中，该基站还包括第二配置单元，用于预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十三种可能的实现方式中，在该发送单元在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该接收单元还用于接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该确定单元还用于根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向，并根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第八方面的第十三种可能的实现方式中任一种可能的实现方式，在第十四种可能的实现方式中，具体实现为：该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
一方面，根据本发明实施例的传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备，UE通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量，进而根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
另一方面，根据本发明实施例的传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备，基站通过在至少一个波束上发送携带标识信息的波束指示信号，并根据UE反馈的该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例或现有技 术描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本发明的一些实施例，对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。
图1是本发明实施例的应用场景示意图。
图2是本发明实施例传输信息的方法流程图。
图3是本发明实施例基站定向发送波束的场景示意图。
图4是本发明实施例传输信息的交互方法流程图。
图5是本发明实施例传输信息的另一交互方法流程图。
图6是本发明实施例传输信息的再一交互方法流程图。
图7是本发明实施例传输信息的再一交互方法流程图。
图8是本发明实施例主波束通信故障的场景示意图。
图9是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的交互方法流程图。
图10是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的另一交互方法流程图。
图11是本发明实施例辅波束变更的交互流程图。
图12是本发明实施例主波束和辅波束都失效后传输信息的交互流程图。
图13是本发明实施例上行波束传输信息的再一交互方法流程图。
图14是本发明实施例传输信息的另一方法流程图。
图15是本发明实施例传输信息的再一方法流程图。
图16是本发明实施例传输信息的再一交互方法流程图。
图17是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的再一交互方法流程图。
图18是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的再一交互方法流程图。
图19是本发明实施例传输信息的再一方法流程图。
图20是本发明实施例用户设备的结构示意图。
图21是本发明实施例基站的结构示意图。
图22是本发明实施例用户设备的另一结构示意图。
图23是本发明实施例基站的另一结构示意图。
图24是本发明实施例用户设备的再一结构示意图。
图25是本发明实施例基站的再一结构示意图。
图26是本发明实施例用户设备的再一结构示意图。
图27是本发明实施例基站的再一结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图，对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本发明中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本发明保护的范围。
本发明的技术方案，可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通讯系统(GSM，Global System of Mobile communication)，码分多址(CDMA，Code Division Multiple Access)系统，宽带码分多址(WCDMA，W标识信息eband Code Division Multiple Access Wireless)，通用分组无线业务(GPRS，General Packet Radio Service)，长期演进(LTE，Long Term Evolution)等。
用户端(UE，User Equipment)，也可称之为移动终端(Mobile Terminal)、移动用户设备等，可以经无线接入网(例如，RAN，Radio Access Network)与一个或多个核心网进行通信，用户设备可以是移动终端，如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)和具有移动终端的计算机，例如，可以是便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置，它们与无线接入网交换语言和/或数据。
基站，可以是GSM或CDMA中的基站(BTS，Base Transceiver Station)，也可以是WCDMA中的基站(NodeB)，还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，本发明并不限定，但为描述方便，下述实施例以eNB为例进行说明。
LTE-A载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation，简称CA)通过对多个连续或者非连续的成员载波(Component Carrier，CC)的聚合可以获取更大的带宽，从而提高峰值数据速率和系统吞吐量。UE所聚合的CC也称为服务小区(Severing Cell)，包括1个主服务小区(Primary cell，PCell)和0至4个辅服务小区(Secondary cell，SCell)。其中主小区负责非接入层(Non Access Stratum，NAS)层安全，辅小区主要提供额外的无线资源用于数据通信。CA支持PCell的切换和SCell的增加、删除、激活、去激活等操作。
波束赋形(Beamforming)：在发射端对数据先加权再发送，形成窄的发射波束，将能量对准目标用户，从而提高目标用户的解调信噪比，对改善小区边缘用户吞吐率特别有效。Beamforming可以获得阵列增益、分集增益和复用增益等有益效果。相同的原理，也可以应用到波束赋形信号的接收。在 接收端通过预加权将能量对准发送波束，从而可以获得更高的增益。
图1是本发明实施例的应用场景示意图。图1中，以LTE-A载波聚合为背景，将LTE-A中较低频段载波和毫米波载波进行聚合为用户提供更高大带宽和更高容量。将较低频段载波作为主小区(PCell)，将毫米波频段作为辅小区(SCell)，PCell和SCell可以共站址(Co-Located)或者非共站址(Non Co-Located)，SCell位于PCell的覆盖范围内或者其覆盖有重叠区域。非共站址情况下，提供PCell的LTE-A基站和提供一个或多个SCell的一个或多个毫米波小基站或远端射频头(RRH，remote radio head)以光纤或者无线相连进行回程(Backhaul)通信。无线回程可以使用微波或者毫米波波段，可以与SCell所在的波段相同或不同。PCell提供广覆盖和移动性管理，SCell主要提供热点覆盖提高数据通信吞吐量。本发明各实施例中涉及的波束赋形(Beamforming)技术既可以指水平面(Horizontal)的波束也可以指垂直面(Vertical)的波束。
此外，本发明实施例的方法，也可适用于毫米波小基站提供PCell服务的场景。
图2是本发明实施例传输信息的方法流程图。图2的方法由UE执行。
201，UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，其中，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息。
应理解，本发明实施例中，该基站为毫米波(mmWave)小基站，或者是3GHz以上的较高频小区的基站。
应理解，基站可以通过多种类型信号来发送波束指示信号，基站以波束的方式周期性发送公共信号，并在波束中携带波束标识(Beam identity，简称为Beam Id)信息。Beam Id用于唯一标识一个波束，每个Beam Id对应于一个预编码码本信息或者一组天线权值(Weight)或向量(Vector)信息。
相应的，UE周期性地接收携带波束指示信号的波束，以从中获取波束中携带的标识信息。
202，该UE根据至少一个波束上的波束指示信号确定该至少一个波束的标识信息。
例如，基站可以通过以波束方式发送的主同步信道或辅同步信道加扰该波束的标识信息，或者通过以波束方式发送的广播信道中广播该波束的波束信息，或者通过以波束方式发送的专门的公共信道用于表示该波束的标识信 息，等等。该波束指示信号可以是小区的发现信号(discovery signal)或称为发现参考信号(discovery reference signal，简称为DRS)，例如为以下信号中的至少一种或多种：主同步信号PSS、辅同步信号SSS、广播信道BCH信息、系统信息广播(SIB，System Information Broadcast)。
UE通过解析上述信号，从而获取波束的标识信息。
203，该UE获取该至少一个波束的信号质量。
UE通过测量该至少一个波束上的信号，得到该至少一个波束的信号质量。
204，该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
应理解，本发明实施例中提到的主波束，如未特别指明，均指下行主波束；类似地，本发明实施例中提到的辅波束，如未特别指明，均指下行辅波束。
该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束，是指基站后续向UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。如前面所述，Beam Id用于唯一标识一个波束，每个Beam Id对应于一个预编码码本信息或者一组天线权值(Weight)或向量(Vector)信息。因此，本发明实施例中，主波束所表示的是该主波束的Beam Id对应的一个预编码码本信息或者一组天线权值(Weight)或向量(Vector)信息所表示的波束资源或通信路径。辅波束的含义与此类似。
另外，本发明实施例中，基站可通过主波束和零至多个辅波束向UE发送下行信号。一般情况下，主波束为UE测量的波束中下行信号质量最好的波束；基站优先通过主波束与UE进行通信。在主波束工作正常时，UE始终可以通过主波束接收基站的公共信令。可选的，基站还可以选择0至多个辅波束与UE通信；辅波束通常可用于协助传输数据信号。此外，辅波束还可用于在主波束工作异常时承载公共信号，以便UE侧能够通过辅波束接收到基站发送的公共信号，增强下行通信的可靠性。
应理解，本发明实施例中，基站在同一波束方向上发送的波束，均指相同的波束资源，可以用于一个波束向量权值表示。基站在主波束上向UE发送下行信号，是指基站在该主波束对应的波束方向上发送波束，发送的波束中携带向UE发送的下行信号。
205，该UE向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携 带该主波束的标识信息。
基站发送波束指示信号可以采用一个循环的方式或者两个循环的方式，对于一个循环的方式：在一个周期内，基站依次向不同的波束方向发送波束信息，从而使波束可以覆盖整个扇区；接收到波束的UE向基站反馈其波束的标识信息。在下一个周期内，基站和UE分别重新执行上述过程。
对于两个循环的方式，在循环1(外循环outer loop)，基站按照上述一个循环的方式发送波束，接收到波束的UE向基站反馈其波束的标识信息。在循环2(内循环inner loop)，基站仅向存在UE的波束位置发送波束，不向不存在UE的方向发送波束，以达到降低对邻区的干扰以及节能的目的，具体如如图3所示。应理解，循环1和循环2可以使用不同的周期，例如循环1使用较大的周期，循环2使用较小的周期，循环2的周期发生在相邻的两个循环1的周期之间。
本发明实施例中，UE通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量，进而根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识(PCI)、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。UE在上报第一波束消息时，还可在第一波束消息中携带PCI及主波束的测量结果。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常。
应理解，第一预定时间段和第一预定阈值可以是基站和UE预先约定的，或者是基站为UE配置的，或者是协议规定地。波束的信号质量，可以是检测到的波束的信干噪比(Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio，SINR)或接收信号强度(Received Signal Strength Indication，RSSI)或参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Received Power，RSRP)或参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Received Quality，RSRQ)，等等。
应理解，在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量，可以是指第一预定时间段内该主波束上检测的平均信号质量。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为一个实施例，当UE确定主波束发生异常时，该方法还包括：该UE向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常。UE可在低频小区上向该基站发送第二波束报告，或者在高频小区的辅波束上发送第二波束报告，以报告基站该UE的主波束发生异常。应理解，本发明实施例中，UE可通过低频小区或高频小区和基站通信。本发明实施例提到的低频小区指UE接入的低频小区；本发明实施例的高频小区指UE接入的高频小区。此外，本发明后续提到的UE与基站通信所使用的低频小区(或高频小区)，都指UE接入的低频小区(或高频小区)。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，当UE确定主波束发生异常时，该方法还包括：该UE在第二探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal，SRS)资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。UE可通过在高频小区的第二SRS资源上向基站发送SRS，以报告基站该UE的主波束发生异常。当然，基站和UE也可规定采用其它专用信号及专用信号所需资源来报告主波束是否发生异常。
在上述主波束发生异常的实施例中，UE通过判断波束异常，告知基站，从而使得基站可以进行相应的处理。例如，基站可以开始使用辅波束中信号质量最好的一个辅波束来发送下行信号，等等。
进一步地，在上述主波束发生异常的实施例中，该方法还包括：该UE在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示该UE在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE在该至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该UE将信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给该基站。本发明实施例中，UE根据基站低频小区上接收到的波束接收指示信息，在高频小区的至少一个波束进行信号接收及测量，并反馈新的主波束给基站，使得基站能够在新的主波束上与UE进行下行通信，增强了基站与UE进行下行通信的可靠性。
可选地，该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该 UE配置的，或者是基站和UE预先约定的，或者是协议规定的。
可选地，该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。本发明实施例中接收端通过生成主波束的接收波束，将能量对准发送主波束，从而可以获得该主波束更高的接收增益。
可选地，该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
进一步地，该方法还包括：该UE在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定该UE的上行主波束；该UE接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该UE在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。本发明实施例中，UE根据下行波束信息决定上行SRS发送波束，以便基站进行上行信道估计确定优选的上行主波束，进而选择优选的上行主波束发送上行信号，从而能够提高UE的上行发送增益。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该辅波束的最大个数是该基站为该UE配置的，或该基站和该UE预先约定的。
应理解，本发明实施例中，基站和UE可以只在主波束上进行通信，也可以通过主波束和辅波束进行多波束通信。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该至少一个辅波束对应的物理小区标识(PCI)、该至少一个辅波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该至少一个辅波束的CSI测量结果、该至少一个辅波束的RRM测量结果。UE在上报第一波束消息时，还可在第一波束消息中携带该至少一个辅波束对应的PCI及该至少一个辅波束的测量结果。当UE上报的第一波束报告消息中携带主波束和辅波束的PCI及测量结果时，基站侧可根据该第一波 束报告消息，决定后续主波束和/或辅波束的更新、切换等处理操作。
可选地，该方法还包括：该UE根据第一辅波束及该第一辅波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该第一辅波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该第一辅波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站在该第一辅波束的下行信息，其中，该第一辅波束是该主波束的一个辅波束，该第一辅波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。本发明实施例中，接收端通过生成辅波束的接收波束，将能量对准发送辅波束，从而可以获得对辅波束更高的接收增益。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则该UE将该主波束作为辅波束，将该第一辅波束作为新的主波束，并向该基站报告新的主波束和辅波束的标识信息。本发明实施例中，根据波束的信道质量调整辅波束，使得基站与UE通信时采用的主波束的信道质量能够维持在一个较好的信道质量水平，从而能够保证基站与UE通信时的通信质量。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则该UE用该第一波束替换该第二辅波束作为该新的辅波束，并将该第一波束和该第二辅波束的标识信息发送给该基站，其中，该第一波束为该UE的波束中该主波束及该辅波束以外的其它波束。本发明实施例中，根据波束的信道质量维护辅波束，使得基站与UE通信时采用的辅波束的信道质量能够得到保证，有利于提高基站与UE通信的可靠性。
可选地，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则该UE在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。本发明实施例中，在当前主波束和所有辅波束都发生异常时，选择预配置的候选波束作为基站与UE之间通信的波束，能够在所有波束失效时迅速恢复通信。
可选地，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束发生异常时，则该UE选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束 标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。本发明实施例中，在当前主波束发生异常时选择预配置波束作为主波束，能够迅速恢复基站与UE的下行通信。
可选地，在该UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：当该UE进入高频小区时，该UE根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据该UE的发现信号在该UE的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向该UE发送波束指示信号。本发明实施例中，通过UE向基站发送发现信号触发基站向UE发送波束指示信号的流程，有利于基站节能，并降低干扰。
下面，将结合具体的实施例，对本发明实施例的方法作进一步的描述。
图4是本发明实施例传输信息的交互方法流程图。图4所示实施中，基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站。
401，基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号。
基站以波束的方式，在至少一个波束上周期性发送波束指示信号，并在波束中携带波束标识(Beam Identity，Beam Id)信息。Beam Id用于唯一标识一个波束，每个Beam Id对应于一个预编码码本信息或者一组天线权值(Weight)或向量(Vector)信息。
基站可以通过以波束方式发送的主同步信道或辅同步信道加扰该波束的Beam Id或者通过以波束方式发送的广播信道中广播该波束的Beam Id，或者通过以波束方式发送的专门的公共信道传输该波束的Beam Id。
具体地，该波束指示信号可以为小区的发现信号(Discovery Signal)或发现参考信号(Discovery Reference Signal，DRS)，例如该波束指示信号可以为专门的小区发现信号或者为以下信号中的至少一种或多种：主同步信号(Primary Synchronization Channel，PSS)、辅同步信号(Secondary Synchronization Channel，SSS)、信道状态信息-参考信号(Channel State Information-Reference Signal，CSI-RS)、小区参考信号(Cell Reference Signal，CRS)、物理广播信道(Physical Broadcast Channel，PBCH)、系统信息广播(System Information Broadcast，SIB)、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
应理解，基站和UE可以预先规定SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、系统信息块1(SIB1)、SIB2等的周期配置信息；或者，基站可通过PCell的系统信息向UE通知SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息， 或者，基站可通过PCell上的专用信令向UE发送SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息；或者，基站可通过SCell的系统信息向UE通知SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息。
在上述几种方式中，当基站通过PCell的系统信息或专用信令向UE通知SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息时，不需要UE事先与SCell获取同步；当基站可通过SCell的系统信息向UE通知SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息时，UE需要先与SCell同步，在与SCell同步之后再读取SCell的系统信息以获取上述周期配置信息。
上述PSS、SSS、PBCH、系统信息块1(SIB1)、SIB2信息利用波束方式发送，其周期信息与对应的波束进行关联，例如针对不同的波束Id具有相同的周期但具有不同的时间偏移量。具体的，如毫米波小基站在子帧0在Beam Id 0方向发送PSS/SSS，在子帧1在Beam Id 1方向发送PSS/SSS，其周期均为10ms；再例如，毫米波小基站在子帧0的正交频分复用(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing，OFDM)符号(symbol)0在Beam Id 0的方向发送PSS/SSS，在子帧0的OFDM符号2在Beam Id 1的方向发送PSS/SSS。同步信号和不同的系统消息其周期和时间偏移量均可以相同或不同。当周期和时间偏移量相同时，在同一子帧(或符号)上的信号可以叠加，也就是说，同步信号和不同的系统消息可以在同一子帧(或符号)上发送信号。
402，UE获取波束的标识信息。
如步骤401所示，基站和UE可以预先规定SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、系统信息块1(SIB1)、SIB2等的周期配置信息；或者，UE可从PCell的系统信息中获取SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息，或者，UE可根据PCell发送的专用信令获取SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息；或者，UE可根据SCell的系统信息获取SCell的PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等的周期配置信息。
UE根据上述周期信息进行盲检以获取至少一个Beam Id信息。例如，UE遍历各Beam Id所对应的PSS/SSS/PBCH周期和时间偏移量检测同步信道或PBCH以获取Beam Id信息。具体地，UE可通过检测SCell的PSS和SSS与SCell获取同步。如果基站通过同步信道加扰Beam Id信息，则UE 检测到上述同步信道后，可以获取Beam Id信息；如果基站通过SCell的PBCH携带Beam Id信息，则UE与SCell获取同步以后再读取SCell的PBCH信息获取Beam Id信息。
应理解，UE可能接收到来自不同方向和/或不同毫米波小基站的波束，并获取到多个Beam Id信息。
403，UE获取波束的信号质量。
UE通过对波束指示信号携带的至少一个波束标识所指示的至少一个波束进行测量，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量。
具体地，该波束的信号质量，可以是检测到的波束的信干噪比(Signal to Interference plus Noise Ratio，SINR)或接收信号强度(Received Signal Strength Indication，RSSI)或参考信号接收功率(Reference Signal Received Power，RSRP)或参考信号接收质量(Reference Signal Received Quality，RSRQ)。
UE通过对波束的上述信号质量参数进行测量，得到波束的测量结果。具体地，该波束的测量结果可以是信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal，CSI-RS)端口(port)信息、信道状态信息(Channel State Information，CSI-RS)测量结果或基于CSI-RS的无线资源管理(Radio Resources Management，RRM)测量结果，等等。
404，UE确定主波束或主波束和辅波束。
基站可为UE配置最大维护的辅波束标识(secondary beam Id)的个数。具体地，基站可通过PSS、SSS、PBCH、SIB1、SIB2等为UE配置最大维护的Secondary Beam Id的个数，不妨记为N。
UE可根据各个波束的信号质量，确定主波束和辅波束。
UE可将波束在预定时间段内测量的信号质量的平均值作为该波束的信号质量。
具体地，UE可确定预定时间段t1内信号质量最好的波束为主波束(Primary Beam)。
一种具体的方式，在确定辅波束时，如果UE的波束的信号质量大于预定阈值Y1，且持续的时间大于t2，该波束才允许作为UE的辅波束；并且，UE最多可选取N个波束作为辅助波束。也就是说，UE选择的辅波束，最少为零个，最多为N个。优选地，UE可按照信号质量从允许作为辅波束的波束中选择不多于N个波束作为辅助波束。
另一种具体的方式，可不考虑UE的波束的信号质量是否大于预定阈值Y1，直接选择信号质量最好的N个(或少于N个)作为辅波束。
例如，UE可以根据检测到的SINR或RSSI等参数的大小进行排序，进而确定主波束(Primary Beam)和辅波束(Secondary Beam)。
另外，t1、t2和Y1的大小，可以是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是基站为UE配置的，或者是UE自己设置的，或者是协议规定的。
405，UE向基站反馈主波束或主波束和辅波束的相关信息。
UE确定基站发送下行信号的主波束或主波束和辅波束后，可通过波束报告消息将这些波束的相关信息上报给基站，不妨记为第一波束报告消息。
具体地，如果步骤404中UE只确定了主波束，则第一波束报告消息可携带Primary Beam Id的信息，而不含Secondary Beam Id的信息；如果步骤404中UE确定了主波束和n个辅波束，则第一波束报告消息可携带一个Primary beam Id和n个Secondary Beam Id的信息。
可选的，UE还可向基站报告主波束和/或辅波束对应的物理小区标识符(Physical Cell Indentity，PCI)信息。例如，当UE只确定了主波束时，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束对应的PCI信息；当UE确定了主波束和n个辅波束时，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束对应的PCI信息，以及该n个辅波束所对应的PCI信息。UE获取PCI信息的方式可参考现有技术，例如，在LTE中，UE可以根据对应波束上的PSS和SSS，通过PSS和SSS结合以表示PCI信息。
可选的，UE还可向基站报告主波束和/或辅波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、CSI测量结果或基于CSI-RS的RRM测量结果。例如，当UE只确定了主波束时，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、CSI测量结果或基于CSI-RS的RRM测量结果；当UE确定了主波束和n个辅波束时，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、CSI测量结果或基于CSI-RS的RRM测量结果，以及该n个辅波束所对应的CSI-RS port信息、CSI测量结果或基于CSI-RS的RRM测量结果。UE获取Beam Id后，在该Beam Id所对应的波束上根据CSI-RS配置信息进行CSI测量或者基于CSI-RS进行RRM测量，其中CSI-RS配置信息包括CSI-RS port和CSI-RS资源配置等信息，CSI-RS port可以属于不同的毫米波小基站。
此外，应理解，UE反馈上述信息时，也可分成多个消息进行反馈，本 发明实施例在此不作限制。本发明实施例以在第一波束报告消息中为例进行说明。
在发送第一波束报告消息时，UE可能通过多种方式反馈。
例如，UE可周期性反馈第一波束报告消息。具体地，UE可根据该至少一个波束的检测和测量周期，周期性检测和测量结果，并进行反馈。
又例如，UE可根据预配置的测量结果门限触发反馈。当UE检测的波束的信号质量达到预定阈值时，可向基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该波束的Beam Id。具体地，该波束的信号质量可以是波束的SINR或RSSI。
又例如，UE可根据基站发送的请求，对该至少一个波束进行检测和测量，并将检测和测量结果通过第一波束报告消息反馈给基站。
对于无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control，RRC)空闲态(IDLE)的UE，可以使用上行公共信道如物理随机接入信道(PRACH，Physical Random Access Channel)进行反馈。
对于RRC连接态(CONNECTED)的UE，可以通过媒体访问控制(Media Access Control；MAC)控制信元(Control Element，CE)或物理上行控制信道(PUCCH，Physical Uplink Control Channel)或RRC信令进行反馈。
UE在上报第一波束报告消息时，可使用基站为UE预先配置的上行专用时频资源，该时频资源可以位于毫米波小区或者UE所聚合的低频小区。特别地，该上行专用时频资源专门用于上报主波束的标识，在基站和/或UE指示波束(主波束或辅波束)出现异常时，或者在基站和/或UE检测到波束失效后，可激活或使能该预留的上行专用时频资源。
406，基站通过主波束向UE发送下行信息。
基站在收到UE的第一波束报告消息后，根据其中的Primary Beam Id确定主波束，然后在该主波束上传输下行信息。
当然，如果第一波束报告消息中还携带Secondary Beam Id的信息时，基站还可确定辅波束。
407，UE根据主波束生成接收波束和/或上行波束。
UE根据主波束生成对应的接收波束(Rx Beam)，然后在Rx Beam上接收下行信息。UE的接收端通过预加权将能量对准发送主波束，可以获得更高的接收增益。
可选地，基站(主基站或毫米波小基站)可为UE预先配置每个Beam Id对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息，UE根据当前主波束的Primary Beam Id所对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收下行信息。
或者，可选地，UE也可以按照现有技术波束训练的方式找到与主波束最佳匹配的接收波束，并在该接收波束上接收下行信息。通过波束训练找到与当前主波束最佳匹配的接收波束，其具体实现可参考现有技术的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
此外，当UE处于连接态时，可采用与主波束对应的上行波束发送探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal，SRS)。
可选的，基站可为UE预先配置每个Beam Id对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息，UE根据当前主波束的Primary Beam Id所对应的上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，然后在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行信息。
或者，可选地，UE可按照现有技术波束训练的方式找到与当前主波束最佳匹配的上行波束，然后在该上行波束上发送上行信息。类似地，通过波束训练找到与当前主波束最佳匹配的上行波束，其具体实现可参考现有技术的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例中，通过UE报告主波束及至少一个辅波束，使得当主波束通信故障时有可能通过备选波束(辅波束)恢复通信，提高了基站通过波束赋形方式发送下行信号的通信可靠性。
此外，应理解，本发明实施例中，基站和UE可以只在主波束上进行通信，也可以通过主波束和辅波束进行多波束通信。
图5是本发明实施例传输信息的交互方法流程图。图5所示实施中，基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站。
501，基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号。
502，UE获取波束的标识信息。
503，UE获取波束的信号质量。
步骤501-503的具体实现可参考图4的步骤401-403的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
504，UE确定主波束。
UE可根据各个波束的信号质量，确定主波束。
UE可将波束在预定时间段内测量的信号质量的平均值作为该波束的信号质量。
具体地，UE可确定预定时间段t1内信号质量最好的波束为主波束(Primary Beam)。
此外，UE和基站可预先约定每一个主波束对应的至少一个辅波束，例如，基站和UE可约定将主波束相邻的波束作为辅波束，等等。或者，基站可为每一个波束配置对应的至少一个辅波束，并将该配置信息发送给UE。
505，UE向基站反馈主波束的相关信息。
UE确定主波束后，可向基站发送波束报告主波束的相关信息。UE可通过第一波束报告消息向基站报告该主波束的相关信息。
与图4的步骤405类似，该第一波束报告消息可携带Primary Beam Id的信息。
可选地，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束对应的PCI信息。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、CSI测量结果或基于CSI-RS的RRM测量结果。
此外，可选地，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束的辅波束对应的PCI信息，和/或，第一波束报告消息还可携带主波束的辅波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、CSI测量结果或基于CSI-RS的RRM测量结果，等等。
发送第一波束报告消息的方式可与图4的步骤405类似。
此外，UE在上报第一波束报告消息时，可使用基站为UE预先配置的上行专用时频资源，该时频资源可以位于毫米波小区或者UE所聚合的低频小区。
506，基站通过主波束向UE发送下行信息。
507，UE根据主波束生成接收波束和/或上行波束。
步骤506-507的具体实现可参考图4的步骤406-407的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例中，通过预配置主波束的辅波束(或预配置根据主波束确定辅波束的规则)，简化了UE的处理和复杂度。
此外，应理解，本发明实施例中，基站和UE可以只在主波束上进行通信，也可以通过主波束和辅波束进行多波束通信。
图6是本发明实施例传输信息的交互方法流程图。图6所示的基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站。
601，基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号。
602，UE获取波束的标识信息。
603，UE获取波束的信号质量。
步骤601-603的具体实现可参考图4的步骤401-403的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
604，UE确定主波束。
UE可根据各个波束的信号质量，确定主波束。UE可将波束在预定时间段内测量的信号质量的平均值作为该波束的信号质量。具体地，UE可确定预定时间段t1内信号质量最好的Beam为Primary Beam。
605，UE向基站反馈主波束的相关信息。
步骤605的具体实现可参考图5的步骤505的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
606，基站通过主波束向UE发送下行信息。
基站在收到UE的报告消息后，根据其中的Primary Beam Id确定主波束，然后在该主波束上传输下行信息。
607，UE根据主波束生成接收波束和/或上行波束。
步骤607的具体实现可参考图4的步骤407的相关记载，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
608，基站确定辅波束。
基站可根据测量UE发送的上行SRS的信号质量，确定辅波束。
具体地，基站首先获取UE在各个波束对应的上行波束的上行SRS的信号质量，再从中选取信号质量最好的若干个上行波束，将其所对应的下行波束(主波束除外)设置为辅波束。UE可以按波束的方式发送SRS，或者按照全向(omni)的方式发送SRS。为避免信号质量太差，或者是信号瞬时峰值的出现导致信号质量测量偏差，可规定当上行波束的信号质量在预定时间t1内大于预定阈值Y1时，该上行波束对应的下行波束(主波束除外)可以作为基站向UE发送下行信号时所采用的辅波束。特别地，如果能够作为辅波束的波束个数大于基站规定的辅波束最大值N，则从中选择最好的N个作为辅波束。
本发明实施例中，UE仅需要报告一个最好的波束，而辅波束则由基站根据上行波束的信号质量维护，从而简化了UE的处理和复杂度。
此外，应理解，本发明实施例中，基站和UE可以只在主波束上进行通信，也可以通过主波束和辅波束进行多波束通信。
在UE确定主波束的方案中，当UE在基站的两次波束指示信号的波束簇循环之间进入时，无法发现高频小区以进行快速接入，不利于低时延业务。图7是本发明实施例传输信息的交互方法流程图。图7所示的基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站或主基站。
701，基站在低频小区广播高频小区的配置信息。
基站在低频小区广播高频小区的配置信息，例如频点信息、带宽等。
特别地，基站可以设置共站的低频小区与高频小区的覆盖范围相同。
702，UE根据高频小区配置信息判断是否进入高频小区。
UE从低频小区中获取高频小区的配置信息，进而根据高频小区的配置信息判断UE是否进入高频小区的覆盖范围。
703，如果进入高频小区，发送发现信号。
当UE发现将要或已经进入高频小区的覆盖范围，UE可根据高频小区的配置信息，向基站发送发现信号。
704，基站根据发现信号确定UE所在位置方向上的至少一个波束。
当基站检测到UE的发现信号后，可根据UE的发现信号判断UE所在的波束位置，确定UE所在位置方向上的至少一个波束，该至少一个波束为下行波束。
705，基站在该至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号。
基站根据UE所在位置方向，在该位置方向上的至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号。
基站发送波束指示信号之后的处理流程可参考图4-6，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例中，基站根据UE进入高频小区后的发现信号针对性地向UE所在方位上的波束发送下行信号，有利于UE的快速接入，同时还可使得提供高频小区的基站节能。
UE与基站通信时，可能存在多种情况导致UE与基站的主波束通信发生异常。例如，当UE移动时，可能导致UE不在初始上报的波束方向后续 通信如果继续沿用原来的波束将导致通信失败；或者当UE移动时，可能会遇到障碍物导致当前工作波束(如视距(LOS，line of sight)径)突发衰减，导致当前波束不可用(not available)；或者，移动障碍物导致UE当前工作波束(如视距(LOS，line of sight)径)突发衰减，导致当前波束不可用(not available)，等等。
图8是本发明实施例主波束通信故障的场景示意图。如图8所示，在外循环阶段，基站在波束1上发送信号给UE1，在波束4上发送信号给UE2。在内循环阶段，由于UE移动导致UE不在初始上报的波束方向，例如，UE2不在波束4的波束方向上。或者，在内循环阶段，由于UE移动遇到障碍或者移动障碍物导致当前工作波束(如视距(LOS，line of sight)径)突发衰减，导致当前波束不可用(not available)，例如，UE1对应的波束1不可用，UE2对应的波束4不可用，等等。因此，需要一种有效的手段，能够迅速检测并恢复主波束的通信。
图9是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的交互方法流程图。图9所示的实施例中，假设UE将同频的多个mmWave小区作为同一个SCell或者将异频的多个mmWave小区进行载波聚合。图9所示的基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站或主基站。
901，UE确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
UE可通过多种方式确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
一种具体的实现方式，如果UE在当前主波束上检测的信号质量小于预定阈值Y2，则认为当前主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果UE在某一时刻检测的当前主波束上检测的信号质量小于Y2，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常；或者，可规定如果UE在预定时间段t3内在当前主波束上检测的信号质量小于Y2，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，t3和Y2可以是UE设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。该主波束的信号质量，可以是主波束的SINR、RSSI、RSRP或RSRQ等。
另一种具体的实现方式，如果UE在当前主波束上检测不到下行信号，则认为当前主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果UE在预定时间段t4内检测不到当前主波束上的下行信号，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，该预定时间段t4可以是UE设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。
902，UE上报主波束的异常信息。
当UE确定主波束发生异常时，UE还可向基站发送报告，指示当前主波束发生故障。
一种具体的实现方式，基站可以为UE配置两种不同的SRS资源(SRS资源1和SRS资源2)，规定当前主波束工作正常时UE按照SRS资源1发送SRS，当前主波束工作异常时UE按照SRS资源2发送SRS。当UE检测到当前主波束工作异常时按照SRS资源2发送SRS，用于基站判断UE原来报告的主波束出现问题。
另一种具体的实现方式，UE可通过辅波束向基站报告当前主波束发生异常。此时，UE和基站可按照辅波束的信号质量从高到低的顺序，依次使用其中一个或多个波束尝试进行通信。具体地，UE可向基站发送一个主波束异常指示信息，用于指示主波束发生异常，或者将主波束当前的信号质量信息发送给基站。
再一种具体的实现方式，UE可通过低频小区向基站报告当前主波束发生异常。具体地，UE可向基站发送一个主波束异常指示信息，用于指示主波束发生异常，或者将主波束当前的信号质量信息发送给基站。
903，基站确定主波束异常。
当基站收到UE的主波束指示信息后，可确定主波束发生异常。
或者，如果基站和UE约定当前主波束工作正常时UE按照SRS资源1发送SRS，当前主波束工作异常时UE按照SRS资源2发送SRS，并且在SRS资源2上接收到SRS，则可确定主波束发生异常。
可选地，基站可重新发送携带波束标识的波束指示信号给UE，重新选择主波束和辅波束，具体实现可参考图4-6的方法。本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
或者，可选地，基站可以和UE实现事先主波束失效后重新确定主波束的方法，等待UE侧发送新的主波束。
904，UE上报主波束的变更信息。
UE可周期性地上报主波束的变更信息。
具体地，UE可根据当前主波束的周期测量主波束和辅波束的信号质量，进而确定主波束是否变更。
UE可将波束在预定时间段内测量的信号质量的平均值作为该波束的信 号质量。
当主波束的信号质量小于预定阈值Y4，并且辅波束中的第一波束的信号质量大于预定阈值Y5，且上述情况持续时间达到预定时间段t6后，UE可将第一波束作为新的主波束，将原来的主波束作为辅波束，并向基站报告新的Primary Beam Id和Secondary Beam Id。
阈值Y4和Y5的取值可以相同或不同。此外，特别地，t6可以取值为0。当t6取值为0时，Y4和Y5取瞬时值即可，也就是说，当主波束的信号质量小于Y4，并且辅波束中的第一波束的信号质量大于Y5，UE可将第一波束作为新的主波束，将原来的主波束作为辅波束。
UE确定新的主波束后，可将新的主波束及原有主波束的标识信息发送给基站。
905，基站切换主波束。
基站根据UE发送的主波束的变更信息，进行主波束的切换。
本发明实施例的一种应用场景，如果图9中基站为毫米波小基站，且新的主波束和旧的主波束都属于同一个毫米波小基站时，则基站可直接更新主波束，并在新的主波束上向UE发送下行消息。
本发明实施例的另一种应用场景，如果图9中所示基站为毫米波小基站(第一基站)，且新的主波束属于旧的主波束所属毫米波小基站的相邻基站(第二基站)，则第一基站可向第二基站发送指示消息，指示第二基站在新的主波束上与UE进行通信。
本发明实施例的再一种应用场景，如果图9中所示基站为原有主波束的毫米波小基站(第一基站)所属的主基站(第三基站)，且新的主波束属于旧的主波束所属毫米波小基站的相邻基站(第二基站)，则第三基站可向第二基站发送指示消息，指示第二基站在新的主波束上与UE进行通信。
应理解，本发明实施例中，当UE确定主波束发生异常时，也可不上报主波束的异常信息，而是直接上报主波束的变更信息。
本发明实施例中，当主波束出现故障后可以利用备选波束迅速恢复通信，提高了波束赋形方式发送下行信号的通信可靠性。应理解，该下行信号，可以是公共信号，或者是业务信号，等等。
图10是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的交互方法流程图。图10所示的实施例中，假设UE将同频的多个mmWave小区作为同一个SCell或 者将异频的多个mmWave小区进行载波聚合。图10所示的基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站。
1001，基站确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
基站也可通过多种方式确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
一种具体的实现方式，如果基站在UE所报告的主波束对应的上行波束上检测不到UE的SRS，则认为UE所报告的主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果基站在预定时间段t5内未能在UE所报告的主波束对应的上行波束上检测到UE的SRS，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，t5可以是基站设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。
另一种具体的实现方式，如果基站在UE所报告的主波束对应的上行波束上检测到的测量信号质量小于预定阈值Y3，则认为UE所报告的主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果基站在某一时刻检测的该上行波束的信号质量小于Y3，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常；或者，可规定如果基站在预定时间段t5内检测的该上行波束的信号质量小于Y3，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，t5和Y3可以是基站设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。
可选地，如果基站确定主波束发生异常，基站可重新发送携带波束标识的波束指示信号给UE，重新选择主波束和辅波束，具体实现可参考图4-6的方法。本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
或者，可选地，如果基站确定主波束发生异常，可向UE发送指示信息，指示UE发送新的主波束的标识，即执行步骤1002。
1002，基站指示UE上报新的主波束。
基站可向UE发送指示消息，指示UE上报新的主波束。
1003，UE上报主波束的变更信息。
步骤1003的具体实现可参考图9的步骤904，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
1004，基站确定主波束。
基站根据UE发送的主波束的变更信息，进行主波束的切换。
如果新的主波束也属于该基站时，则该基站直接更新主波束，并在新的主波束上向UE发送下行消息。
如果新的主波束属于该基站的相邻基站(第二基站)，则基站可向第二 基站发送指示消息，指示第二基站在新的主波束上与UE进行通信。
本发明实施例中，当主波束出现故障后可以利用备选波束迅速恢复通信，提高了波束赋形方式发送下行信号的通信可靠性。应理解，该下行信号，可以是公共信号，或者是业务信号，等等。
图11是本发明实施例辅波束变更的交互流程图。
1101，确定当前辅波束变更信息。
UE可根据当前辅波束的信号质量，确定当前辅波束变更信息。
如果UE在当前辅波束中信号质量最差的第二波束小于预定阈值Y6时，则测量当前辅波束集合之外的其它波束的信号质量。当有其它波束中的第三波束的信号质量大于预定阈值Y7，且上述情况持续时间达到预定时间段t7后，将第三波束替换第二波束作为辅波束。
应理解，本发明实施例中，Y6-Y7可以相同或不同。另外，特别地，当t7取值为0时，Y6和Y7取瞬时值即可，也就是说，如果UE在当前辅波束中信号质量最差的第二波束小于Y6时，且主波束和辅波束之外的其它波束中的第三波束的信号质量大于Y7，则将第三波束替换第二波束作为辅波束。
1102，确定当前辅波束变更信息。
UE确定新的辅波束后，可将辅波束的变更信息发送给基站。
1103，基站更新辅波束。
基站根据UE发送的辅波束的变更信息，确定新的辅波束。
以UE将该第二波束和该第三波束的标识信息报告给基站为例，基站可确定辅波束变更，并更新辅波束。
基站可更新用于记录辅波束的列表，在列表中删除第二波束的标识信息，并增加第三波束的标识信息。
当然，还可能存在其它的应用场景，本发明实施例在此不再一一细述。
图12是本发明实施例主波束和辅波束都失效后传输信息的交互流程图。本发明实施例中，基站可预先为UE配置至少一个候选波束的标识信息，用于主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
1201，基站和/或UE确定主波束和辅波束是否失效。
基站或UE可确定主波束和辅波束是否失效，即判断主波束和辅波束是否发生异常。
具体地，UE确定主波束是否失效的具体实现可参考图9的步骤901中 的相关记载，基站确定主波束是否失效的具体实现可参考图9的步骤903或图10的步骤1001中的相关记载；UE确定辅波束是否失效的具体实现可参考图11的步骤1101中的相关记载。基站判断辅波束是否失效的过程与基站判断主波束是否失效的过程类似，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
1202，如果都失效，基站和UE使用候选波束通信。
如果基站和/或UE判断主波束和所有辅波束都失效，则基站和UE在该至少一个候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试进行下行通信。
特别地，如果UE接收下行信号都失败，可触发新的波束训练过程。其波束训练的具体实现可参考现有技术，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
本实施例一般应用于某些特殊区域，例如在小区的某些特殊位置，只能通过反射的方法形成一些非视距(Non Line Of Sight，NLOS)通信路径。此时，基站和UE可以根据部署判断这些通信路径(波束)的Beam Id信息。
图13是本发明实施例上行波束传输信息的交互方法流程图。
1301，UE根据主波束确定至少一个上行波束。
确定主波束后，UE可根据主波束进行上行波束训练。UE可确定主波束的方向上的至少一个上行波束，用于发送上行SRS(或上行发现信号)。
1302，UE在至少一个上行波束上发送上行SRS。
UE在当前主波束的方向上发送多次不同波束方向的上行SRS。
1302，基站根据上行SRS确定上行主波束。
基站根据多个上行波束SRS测量结果，确定信号质量最好的一个上行波束为UE的上行主波束。
1304，基站发送上行主波束标识信息。
基站确定上行主波束后，可将上行主波束标识信息发送给UE。
1305，UE通过上行主波束发送上行信息。
UE在上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束发送上行信息。
当然，应理解，如果基站向UE发送下行信号的主波束发生变化，则需要重新进行上述上行波束的训练过程。
本发明实施例中，通过对上行波束进行训练，从而能够获得信号质量较好的上行波束，有利于UE的上行传输。
图14是本发明实施例传输信息的另一方法流程图。图14的方法由基站执行。应理解，本发明实施例所提到的基站为毫米波小基站。该方法包括：
1401，基站的至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息。
可选地，该波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
1402，该基站接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该主波束的标识信息，该主波束由该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定。
1403，该基站根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束。
本发明实施例中，基站在至少一个波束上发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号中携带该至少一个波束的标识信息，并根据UE侧反馈该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；如果该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；如果该基站检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常。
上述两个实施例中，基站通过检测主波束对应的上行波束的信号，来确定主波束是否发生异常。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该基站在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
本发明实施例中，基站根据UE发送RSR信令时所使用的SRS资源，确定主波束的工作状态，可以节省信令传递的开销。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该基站在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
进一步地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该基站在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
可选地，作为一个实施例，在该基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该基站根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向；该基站根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
本发明图14所示实施例的方法的具体实现，可参考图4至图7及图9 至图13所示实施例中基站执行的方法，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图15是本发明实施例传输信息的另一方法流程图。图15的方法由UE执行。该方法包括：
1501，UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息。
应理解，本发明实施例中，该基站为毫米波小基站，或者是3GHz以上的较高频小区所在的基站。
1502，该UE根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号确定该至少一个波束的标识信息。
UE通过解析波束上的波束指示信号，从而获取波束的标识信息。
1503，该UE获取该至少一个波束的信号质量信息。
UE通过测量该至少一个波束上的信号，得到该至少一个波束的信号质量。
1504，该UE向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息。
1505，该UE接收该基站发送的主波束的标识信息，并根据该主波束的标识信息确定主波束，其中，该主波束由该基站根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息确定。
本发明实施例中，通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量并发送给该基站，以便该基站确定向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息包括以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。进一步地，该第一波束报告消息还可携带该主波束对应的物理小区标识。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则该UE确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为一个实施例，如果该UE确定该主波束发生异常时，该方法还包括：该UE向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，如果该UE确定该主波束发生异常时，该方法还包括：该UE在第二SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
可选地，在上述主波束发生异常的实施例中，该方法还包括：该UE在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示该UE在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE在该高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该UE获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该UE将信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给该基站。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
可选地，该方法还包括：该UE根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
可选地，该方法还包括：该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个的上行SRS的测量结果确定该UE的上行主波束；该UE接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该UE在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该UE根据该第一波束报 告消息确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则该UE将该主波束和该第一辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则该UE将该第一波束和该第二辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则该UE在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
可选地，该方法还包括：如果该UE当前的主波束发生异常时，则该UE选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
可选地，在该UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：当该UE进入高频小区时，该UE根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据该UE的发现信号在该UE的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向该UE发送波束指示信号。
下面，将结合具体的实施例，对本发明实施例的方法作进一步的描述。
图16是本发明实施例传输信息的交互方法流程图。图16所示实施中，基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站。
1601，基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号。
1602，UE获取波束的标识信息。
1603，UE获取波束的信道质量。
步骤1601至1603的具体实现可参考图4的步骤401至403，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
1604，UE反馈波束的信道质量。
一种具体的实现方式，UE获取该至少一个波束的信道质量后，可向基站反馈该至少一个波束的信道质量。
另一种具体的实现方式，UE获取该至少一个波束的信道质量后，可向基站反馈该至少一个波束中信道质量较好的若干个波束的信道质量。
此外，UE反馈的信息中，可以包括波束标识及对应的信道质量。
1605，基站确定主波束和/或辅波束。
基站根据UE反馈的波束的信道质量，确定信道质量最优的波束为主波束。
此外，在确定辅波束时，一种具体的实现方式，基站可预先为UE配置主波束标识的对应的辅波束，例如，基站和UE可约定将主波束相邻的波束作为辅波束，等等；另一种具体的实现方式，基站可从UE反馈的波束中选择出信道质量最优的若干个波束，其中最优的作为主波束，其余的作为辅波束。
1606，基站发送主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息。
基站确定主波束和/或辅波束后，可将主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息发送给UE。具体地，基站可通过专用信令发送给UE，该专用信令可以是RRC信令或MAC CE信令或物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel，PDCCH)信令。
1607，基站通过主波束向UE发送下行信息。
基站在确定主波束后，可通过主波束传输下行信息。
1608，UE根据主波束生成接收波束和/或上行波束。
步骤1608的具体实现可参考图4的步骤407，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例中，基站通过UE报告的波束的信号质量，确定主波束及至少一个辅波束，使得当主波束通信故障时有可能通过备选波束(辅波束)恢复通信，提高了基站通过波束赋形方式发送下行信号的通信可靠性。
类似地，在基站侧确定主波束的方案中，当UE在基站的两次波束指示信号的波束簇循环之间进入时，UE无法发现高频小区以进行快速接入，不利于低时延业务。
图17是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的交互方法流程图。图17所示的实施例中，假设UE将同频的多个mmWave小区作为同一个SCell或 者将异频的多个mmWave小区进行载波聚合。图17所示的基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站或主基站。
1701，UE确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
UE可通过多种方式确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
一种具体的实现方式，如果UE在当前主波束上检测的信号质量小于预定阈值Y2，则认为当前主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果UE在某一时刻检测的当前主波束上检测的信号质量小于Y2，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常；或者，可规定如果UE在预定时间段t3内在当前主波束上检测的信号质量小于Y2，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，t3和Y2可以是UE设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。该主波束的信号质量，可以是主波束的SINR、RSSI、RSRP或RSRQ等。
另一种具体的实现方式，如果UE在当前主波束上检测不到下行信号，则认为当前主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果UE在预定时间段t4内检测不到当前主波束上的下行信号，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，该预定时间段t4可以是UE设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。
1702，UE上报主波束的异常信息。
当UE确定主波束发生异常时，UE还可向基站发送报告，指示当前主波束发生故障。
一种具体的实现方式，基站可以为UE配置两种不同的SRS资源(SRS资源1和SRS资源2)，规定当前主波束工作正常时UE按照SRS资源1发送SRS，当前主波束工作异常时UE按照SRS资源2发送SRS。当UE检测到当前主波束工作异常时按照SRS资源2发送SRS，用于基站判断UE原来报告的主波束出现问题。
另一种具体的实现方式，UE可通过辅波束向基站报告当前主波束发生异常。此时，UE和基站可按照辅波束的信号质量从高到低的顺序，依次使用其中一个或多个波束尝试进行通信。具体地，UE可向基站发送一个主波束异常指示信息，用于指示主波束发生异常，或者将主波束当前的信号质量信息发送给基站。
再一种具体的实现方式，UE可通过低频小区向基站报告当前主波束发生异常。具体地，UE可向基站发送一个主波束异常指示信息，用于指示主 波束发生异常，或者将主波束当前的信号质量信息发送给基站。
1703，基站确定主波束异常。
当基站收到UE的主波束指示信息后，可确定主波束发生异常。
或者，如果基站和UE约定当前主波束工作正常时UE按照SRS资源1发送SRS，当前主波束工作异常时UE按照SRS资源2发送SRS，并且在SRS资源2上接收到SRS，则可确定主波束发生异常。
可选地，基站可重新发送携带波束标识的波束指示信号给UE，重新选择主波束和辅波束，具体实现可参考图4-6的方法。本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
或者，可选地，基站可以等待UE上报当前质量最好的若干个波束及其信号质量，即执行步骤1704。
1704，UE上报波束的信号质量信息。
UE可将波束在预定时间段内测量的信号质量的平均值作为该波束的信号质量。
第一种方式中，当主波束的信号质量小于预定阈值Y4，并且辅波束中的第一波束的信号质量大于预定阈值Y5，且上述情况持续时间达到预定时间段t6后，UE可将该第一波束和该主波束的信号质量报告给基站，以便基站确定新的主波束和辅波束。
或者，第二种方式中，当主波束的信号质量小于预定阈值Y4，且上述情况持续时间达到预定时间段t6后，UE可将信号质量最好的若干个波束及其信号质量发送给基站，以便基站确定新的主波束和辅波束。
1705，基站确定主波束和/或辅波束。
基站可根据UE上报的波束的信号质量，重新确定新的主波束。
当UE以第一种方式上报时，基站可确定第一波束为主波束。
此外，如果基站和UE事先约定每个主波束对应的辅波束，则根据主波束与辅波束的对应规则确定辅波束；或者，基站确定原主波束为辅波束，其余辅波束保持不变。
当UE以第二种方式上报时，基站可确定信号质量最好的一个波束为主波束。
此外，如果基站和UE事先约定每个主波束对应的辅波束，则根据主波束与辅波束的对应规则确定辅波束；或者，基站确定其余信号质量较好的若 干个波束作为辅波束。
1706，基站发送主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息。
基站确定主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息后，可将主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息发给UE。
1707，基站切换主波束。
基站确定主波束后，可进行主波束的切换，其具体实现可参考图9的步骤905，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
应理解，本发明实施例中，当UE确定主波束发生异常时，也可不上报主波束的异常信息，而是直接上报主波束的变更信息。
本发明实施例中，当主波束出现故障后可以利用备选波束迅速恢复通信，提高了波束赋形方式发送下行信号的通信可靠性。应理解，该下行信号，可以是公共信号，或者是业务信号，等等。
图18是本发明实施例主波束异常后传输信息的交互方法流程图。图18所示的实施例中，假设UE将同频的多个mmWave小区作为同一个SCell或者将异频的多个mmWave小区进行载波聚合。图18所示的基站为LTE载波聚合中的毫米波小基站。
1801，基站确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
基站也可通过多种方式确定当前主波束是否发生异常。
一种具体的实现方式，如果基站在UE所报告的主波束对应的上行波束上检测不到UE的SRS，则认为UE所报告的主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果基站在预定时间段t5内未能在UE所报告的主波束对应的上行波束上检测到UE的SRS，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，t5可以是基站设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。
另一种具体的实现方式，如果基站在UE所报告的主波束对应的上行波束上检测到的测量信号质量小于预定阈值Y3，则认为UE所报告的主波束发生异常。具体地，可规定如果基站在某一时刻检测的该上行波束的信号质量小于Y3，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常；或者，可规定如果基站在预定时间段t5内检测的该上行波束的信号质量小于Y3，则即可认为当前主波束发生异常。其中，t5和Y3可以是基站设置的，或者是基站和UE预先规定的，或者是协议规定的。
可选地，如果基站确定主波束发生异常，基站可重新发送携带波束标识 的波束指示信号给UE，重新选择主波束和辅波束，具体实现可参考图4-6的方法。本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
或者，可选地，如果基站确定主波束发生异常，可向UE发送指示信息，指示UE报波束的信号质量，即执行步骤1802。
1802，基站指示UE上报波束的信号质量。
基站可向UE发送指示消息，指示UE上报当前波束的信号质量。
1803，UE上报波束的信号质量信息。
UE可将波束在预定时间段内测量的信号质量的平均值作为该波束的信号质量。
第一种方式中，UE可将信号质量最好的若干个波束及其信号质量发送给基站，以便基站确定新的主波束和辅波束。
或者，第二种方式中，UE可将所有波束及其信号质量发送给基站，以便基站确定新的主波束和辅波束。
1804，基站确定主波束和/或辅波束。
基站可根据UE上报的波束的信号质量，重新确定新的主波束。
此外，如果基站和UE事先约定每个主波束对应的辅波束，则根据主波束与辅波束的对应规则确定辅波束；或者，基站确定其余信号质量较好的若干个波束作为辅波束。
1805，基站发送主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息。
基站确定主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息后，可将主波束和/或辅波束的标识信息发给UE。
1806，基站切换主波束。
基站确定主波束后，可进行主波束的切换，其具体实现可参考图9的步骤905，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
本发明实施例中，当主波束出现故障后可以利用备选波束迅速恢复通信，提高了波束赋形方式发送下行信号的通信可靠性。应理解，该下行信号，可以是公共信号，或者是业务信号，等等。
此外，本发明图15所示实施例的部分方法的具体实现，还可参考图7、图12、图13所示实施例中UE执行的方法，本发明在此不再赘述。
图19是本发明实施例传输信息的另一方法流程图。图19的方法由基站执行，该基站为毫米波小基站，或者是3GHz以上的较高频小区所在的基站。 该方法包括：
1901，基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息.
1902，该基站接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息.
1903，该基站根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
本发明实施例中，基站通过在至少一个波束上发送携带波束标识的波束指示信号，并根据UE反馈的该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；如果该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；如果该基站检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则该基站确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该方法还包括：如果该基站在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
可选地，该信号质量信息以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。进一步地，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束对应的物理小区标识。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站为该UE的至少一个 波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该基站在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
进一步地，作为一个实施例，该方法还包括：该基站在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该基站在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
可选地，作为一个实施例，在该基站在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该方法还包括：该基站接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该基站根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向；该基站根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
本发明图19所示实施例的方法的具体实现，可参考图16至图18及图7、图12、图13所示实施例中基站执行的方法，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图20是本发明实施例用户设备2000的结构示意图。用户设备2000包括：
接收单元2001，用于接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
获取单元2002，用于根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少 一个波束的标识信息；
获取单元2002还用于获取该至少一个波束的信号质量；
确定单元2003，用于根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该基站向用户设备2000发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；
发送单元2004，用于向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该主波束的标识信息。
本发明实施例中，用户设备2000通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量，进而根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识(PCI)、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。UE在上报第一波束消息时，还可在第一波束消息中携带PCI及主波束的测量结果。
可选地，作为一个实施例，确定单元2003还用于：如果在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，确定单元2003还用于：如果在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，确定单元2003还用于：当该主波束发生异常时，向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，发送单元2004还用于：当该主波束发生异常时，在第二SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为用户设备2000配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示用户设备2000在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
进一步地，在上述主波束发生异常的实施例中，接收单元2001还用于在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示用户设备2000在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；接收单元2001还用于在该高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；获取单元2002 还用于获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；发送单元2004还用于将该高频小区的至少一个波束中信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给该基站。
可选地，该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的，或者是基站和UE预先约定的，或者是协议规定的。
可选地，接收单元2001还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
可选地，发送单元2004还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
可选地，发送单元2004还用于在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定用户设备2000的上行主波束；接收单元2001还用于接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；发送单元2004还用于在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，确定单元2003还用于根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该辅波束的最大个数是该基站为用户设备2000配置的，或该基站和用户设备2000预先约定的。
可选地，作为一个实施例，确定单元2003还用于：当用户设备2000检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则将该主波束作为辅波束，将该第一辅波束作为新的主波束；发送单元2004还用于向该基站报告新的主波束和辅波束的标识信息。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，确定单元2003还用于当用户设备2000检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则用该第一波束替 换该第二辅波束作为该新的辅波束；发送单元2004还用于将该第一波束和该辅波束的标识信息发送给该基站；其中，该第一波束为用户设备2000的波束中该主波束及该辅波束以外的其它波束。
可选地，发送单元2004还用于：当用户设备2000当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
可选地，确定单元2003还用于：当用户设备2000当前的主波束发生异常时，则选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
可选地，发送单元2004还用于：当用户设备2000进入高频小区时，根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据用户设备2000的发现信号在用户设备2000的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向用户设备2000发送波束指示信号。
此外，用户设备2000还可执行图2的方法，并实现UE在图4至图7及图9至图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图21是本发明实施例基站2100的结构示意图。基站2100包括：
发送单元2101，用于在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
接收单元2102，用于接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束中的主波束的标识信息，该主波束由该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定；
确定单元，用于根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束。
本发明实施例中，基站2100在至少一个波束上发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号中携带该至少一个波束的标识信息，并根据UE侧反馈该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，作为一个实施例，基站2100还包括检测单元2104，用于在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；确定单元2103还用于如果该检测单元2104在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，基站2100还包括检测单元2104，用于在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；确定单元2103还用于如果该检测单元2104检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该接收单元2102还用于在第二SRS资源上接收该UE发送的SRS；该确定单元2103还用于当该接收单元2102在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该接收单元2102还用于接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的物理小区标识、该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为该UE配置的。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站还包括第一配置单元，用于为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息，和/或
用于为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该确定单元2103还用于根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该检测单元2104还用于获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该确定单元2103还用于在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
进一步地，作为一个实施例，该发送单元2101还用于在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该发送单元2101还用于在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站还包括第二配置单元，用于预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
可选地，作为一个实施例，在该发送单元2101在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该接收单元2102还用于接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该确定单元2103还用于根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向，并根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
此外，基站2100还可执行图14的方法，并实现基站在图4至图7及图9至图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图22是本发明实施例用户设备2200的结构示意图。该用户设备2200包括：
接收单元2201，用于接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
获取单元2202，用于根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少一个波束的标识信息；
该获取单元2202还用于获取该至少一个波束的信号质量；
发送单元2203，用于向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
接收单元2201，还用于接收该基站发送的主波束标识信息；
确定单元2204，用于根据该主波束标识信息确定主波束。
本发明实施例中，通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量并发送给该基站，以便该基站确定向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，该第一波束报告消息包括以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。进一步地，该第一波束报告消息还可携带该主波束对应的物理小区标识。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该确定单元2204还用于：如果在第一预定时间段内在该主波束上检测的信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该确定单元2204还用于：如果在第二预定时间段内检测不到该主波束上的下行信号，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该发送单元2203还用于：当该主波束发生异常时，向该基站发送第二波束报告消息，该波束报告消息用于指示该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该发送单元2203还用于：当该主波束发生异常时，在第二SRS资源上向该基站发送SRS，其中，该基站为用户设备2200配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示用户设备2200在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
可选地，在上述主波束发生异常的实施例中，该接收单元2201还用于在低频小区上接收该基站发送的波束接收指示信息，该波束接收指示信息指示用户设备2200在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该接收单元2201还用于在该高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；该获取单元2202还用于获取该高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；该发送单元2203还用于将该至少一个波束的信号质量反馈给该基站。
可选地，作为一个实施例，用户设备2200发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站为用户设备2200配置的。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该接收单元2201还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收该基站的下行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
可选地，该发送单元2203还用于根据该主波束及该主波束对应的一个 或多个上行波束向量信息生成该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向该基站发送上行信息，其中，该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是该基站预先配置的。
可选地，该发送单元2203还用于在该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便该基站根据该主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定用户设备2200的上行主波束；该接收单元2201还用于接收该基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；该发送单元2203还用于在该上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站和用户设备2200预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该确定单元2204还用于根据该第一波束报告消息确定该至少一个辅波束，其中，该第一波束报告消息还携带该至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该发送单元2203还用于当用户设备2200检测到该主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且该第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则将该主波束和该第一辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该发送单元2203还用于当用户设备2200检测到该第二辅波束的信号质量小于第四预定阈值，且第一波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第四预定时间段，则将该第一波束和该第二辅波束的标识信息及对应的信道质量发送给该基站。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该发送单元2203还用于：当用户设备2200当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与该基站进行通信，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
可选地，该确定单元2204还用于：当用户设备2200当前的主波束发生异常时，则选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，该候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
可选地，该发送单元2203还用于：当用户设备2200进入高频小区时，根据高频小区的配置信息向该基站发送发现信号，以便该基站根据用户设备 2200的发现信号在用户设备2200的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向用户设备2200发送波束指示信号。
此外，用户设备2200还可执行图15的方法，并实现UE在图16至图18及图7、图12、图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图23是本发明实施例基站2300的结构示意图。基站2300包括：
发送单元2301，用于在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
接收单元2302，用于接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
确定单元2303，用于根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
本发明实施例中，基站2300通过在至少一个波束上发送携带波束标识的波束指示信号，并根据UE反馈的该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
可选地，该信号质量信息以下至少一种信息：该主波束对应的CSI-RS port信息、该主波束对应的CSI测量结果、该主波束对应的RRM测量结果。进一步地，该第一波束报告消息还携带该主波束对应的物理小区标识。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站2300还包括：检测单元2304，用于在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；确定单元2303还用于如果该检测单元2304在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测不到该UE的测量信号，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该基站2300还包括：检测单元2304，用于在该主波束对应的上行波束中检测该UE的上行信号；确定单元2303还用于如果该检测单元2304检测到该UE在该主波束对应的上行波束中的测量信号质量小于第一预定阈值，则确定该主波束发生异常。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该接收单元2302还用于在第二SRS资源上接收该UE发送的SRS；该确定单元2303还用于当该接收单元2302在第二SRS资源上接收到该UE发送的SRS，则确定该主波束发生异常，其中，该基站2300为该UE配置第一SRS资源和该第二SRS资源，并指示该UE在主波束工作正常时从该第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从 该第二SRS资源发送SRS。
可选地，作为再一个实施例，该接收单元2302还用于接收该UE发送的第二波束报告信息，该第二波束报告信息指示该主波束工作发生异常。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该UE发送该第一波束报告消息的上行时频资源是该基站2300为该UE配置的。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站2300还包括第一配置单元，用于：
为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息；和/或
为该UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站2300和该UE预先约定该主波束相邻的若干个波束作为该辅波束。
可选地，作为另一个实施例，该确定单元2303还用于：根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息确定该主波束的至少一个辅波束。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该检测单元2304还用于获取该UE在该至少一个波束中该主波束以外的波束对应的上行波束上发送的上行SRS的信号质量；该确定单元2303还用于在该至少一个波束中选择上行SRS的信号质量较好的至少一个波束作为该主波束的辅波束。
进一步地，作为一个实施例，该发送单元2301还用于在低频小区上向该UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便该UE在高频小区上查找到该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在该至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；该发送单元2301还用于在该至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
可选地，作为一个实施例，该基站2300还包括第二配置单元，用于预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当该主波束和所有辅波束失效时，该基站2300和该UE通过该主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
可选地，作为一个实施例，在该发送单元2301在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号之前，该接收单元2302还用于接收该UE进入高频小区时发送的发现信号；该确定单元2303还用于根据该UE的发现信号确定该UE的位置方向，并根据该UE的位置方向确定该至少一个波束，其中，该 至少一个波束位于该UE的位置方向上。
此外，基站2300还可执行图19的方法，并实现基站在图16至图18及图7、图12、图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图24是本发明实施例用户设备2400的结构示意图。用户设备2400可包括处理器2402、存储器2403、发射机2401和接收机2404。在具体的应用中，该用户设备2400可以是等。
接收机2404、发射机2401、处理器2402和存储器2403通过总线2406系统相互连接。总线2406可以是ISA总线、PCI总线或EISA总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图24中仅用一个双向箭头表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。具体的应用中，发射机2401和接收机2404可以耦合到天线2405。
存储器2403，用于存放程序。具体地，程序可以包括程序代码，所述程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2403可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器，并向处理器2402提供指令和数据。存储器2403可能包含高速RAM存储器，也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如至少一个磁盘存储器。
处理器2402，执行存储器2403所存放的程序，并具体用于执行以下操作：
通过接收机2404接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少一个波束的标识信息；
获取该至少一个波束的信号质量；
根据该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定该基站向用户设备2400发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；
通过发射机2401向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该主波束的标识信息。
上述如本发明图2、图4至图7及图9至图13任一实施例揭示的用户设备执行的方法可以应用于处理器2402中，或者由处理器2402实现。处理器2402可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器2402中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式 的指令完成。上述的处理器2402可以是通用处理器，包括中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，简称CPU)、网络处理器(Network Processor，简称NP)等；还可以是数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本发明实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器2403，处理器2402读取存储器2403中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本发明实施例中，用户设备2400通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量，进而根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
此外，用户设备2400还可通过处理器2402、发射机2401和接收机2404等执行图2的方法，并实现UE在图4至图7及图9至图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图25是本发明实施例基站2500的结构示意图。基站2500可包括处理器2502、存储器2503、发射机2501和接收机2504。在具体的应用中，该基站2500可以是等。
接收机2504、发射机2501、处理器2502和存储器2503通过总线2506系统相互连接。总线2506可以是ISA总线、PCI总线或EISA总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图25中仅用一个双向箭头表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。具体的应用中，发射机2501和接收机2504可以耦合到天线2505。
存储器2503，用于存放程序。具体地，程序可以包括程序代码，所述程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2503可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器，并向处理器2502提供指令和数据。存储器2503可能包含高速RAM存储器，也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如至少一 个磁盘存储器。
处理器2502，执行存储器2503所存放的程序，并具体用于执行以下操作：
通过发射机2501在至少一个波束上向UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
通过接收机2504接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束中的主波束的标识信息，该主波束由该UE根据该至少一个波束的信号质量确定；
根据该第一波束报告消息确定该主波束。
上述如本发明图4至图7及图9至图14中任一实施例揭示的基站执行的方法可以应用于处理器2502中，或者由处理器2502实现。处理器2502可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器2502中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器2502可以是通用处理器，包括中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，简称CPU)、网络处理器(Network Processor，简称NP)等；还可以是数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本发明实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器2503，处理器2502读取存储器2503中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本发明实施例中，基站2500在至少一个波束上发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号中携带该至少一个波束的标识信息，并根据UE侧反馈该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
此外，基站2500还可通过处理器2502、发射机2501和接收机2504等执行图14的方法，并实现基站在图4至图7及图9至图13所示实施例的功 能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图26是本发明实施例用户设备2600的结构示意图。用户设备2600可包括处理器2602、存储器2603、发射机2601和接收机2604。在具体的应用中，该用户设备2600可以是等。
接收机2604、发射机2601、处理器2602和存储器2603通过总线2606系统相互连接。总线2606可以是ISA总线、PCI总线或EISA总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图26中仅用一个双向箭头表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。具体的应用中，发射机2601和接收机2604可以耦合到天线2605。
存储器2603，用于存放程序。具体地，程序可以包括程序代码，所述程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2603可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器，并向处理器2602提供指令和数据。存储器2603可能包含高速RAM存储器，也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如至少一个磁盘存储器。
处理器2602，执行存储器2603所存放的程序，并具体用于执行以下操作：
通过接收机2604接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
根据该至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取该至少一个波束的标识信息；
获取该至少一个波束的信号质量；
通过发射机2601向该基站发送第一波束报告消息，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
通过接收机2604接收该基站发送的主波束标识信息；
根据该主波束标识信息确定主波束。
上述如本发明图16至图18及图7、图12、图13任一实施例揭示的用户设备执行的方法可以应用于处理器2602中，或者由处理器2602实现。处理器2602可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器2602中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器2602可以是通用处理器，包括中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，简称CPU)、网络处理器(Network Processor，简 称NP)等；还可以是数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本发明实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器2603，处理器2602读取存储器2603中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本发明实施例中，用户设备2600通过基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号中携带的标识信息，获取该至少一个波束的信号质量并发送给该基站，以便该基站确定向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
此外，用户设备2600还可通过处理器2602、发射机2601和接收机2604等执行图15的方法，并实现UE在图16至图18及图7、图12、图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
图27是本发明实施例基站2700的结构示意图。基站2700可包括处理器2702、存储器2703、发射机2701和接收机2704。在具体的应用中，该基站2700可以是等。
接收机2704、发射机2701、处理器2702和存储器2703通过总线2706系统相互连接。总线2706可以是ISA总线、PCI总线或EISA总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图27中仅用一个双向箭头表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。具体的应用中，发射机2701和接收机2704可以耦合到天线2705。
存储器2703，用于存放程序。具体地，程序可以包括程序代码，所述程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2703可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器，并向处理器2702提供指令和数据。存储器2703可能包含高速RAM存储器，也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如至少一个磁盘存储器。
处理器2702，执行存储器2703所存放的程序，并具体用于执行以下操 作：
通过发射机2701在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，该波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
通过接收机2704接收该UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，该第一波束报告消息携带该至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
根据该至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定该基站向该UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
上述如本发明图16-19及图7、图12、图13中任一实施例揭示的基站执行的方法可以应用于处理器2702中，或者由处理器2702实现。处理器2702可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器2702中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器2702可以是通用处理器，包括中央处理器(Central Processing Unit，简称CPU)、网络处理器(Network Processor，简称NP)等；还可以是数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本发明实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器2703，处理器2702读取存储器2703中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
本发明实施例中，基站2700通过在至少一个波束上发送携带波束标识的波束指示信号，并根据UE反馈的该至少一个波束的信号质量，确定基站向UE发送下行信号所使用的主波束，有利于提高基站进行下行通信时的通信质量。
此外，基站2700还可通过处理器2702、发射机2701和接收机2704等执行图19的方法，并实现基站在图16至图18及图7、图12、图13所示实施例的功能，本发明实施例在此不再赘述。
应理解，在本发明的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味 着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本发明实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本发明的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(ROM，Read-Only Memory)、 随机存取存储器(RAM，Random Access Memory)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本发明的具体实施方式，但本发明的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。因此，本发明的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (43)

  1. 一种传输信息的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    用户设备UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    所述UE根据所述至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取所述至少一个波束的标识信息；
    所述UE获取所述至少一个波束的信号质量；
    所述UE根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量，确定所述基站向所述UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；
    所述UE向所述基站发送第一波束报告消息，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述主波束的标识信息。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    当所述主波束发生异常时，所述UE向所述基站发送第二波束报告消息，所述波束报告消息用于指示所述主波束发生异常；或者
    当所述主波束发生异常时，所述UE在第二探测参考信号SRS资源上向所述基站发送SRS，其中，所述基站为所述UE配置第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源，并指示所述UE在主波束工作正常时从所述第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从所述第二SRS资源发送SRS。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述UE在低频小区上接收所述基站发送的波束接收指示信息，所述波束接收指示信息指示所述UE在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；
    所述UE在所述高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；
    所述UE获取所述高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；
    所述UE将信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给所述基站。
  4. 如权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：所述主波束对应的物理小区标识、所述主波束对应的信道状态信息参考信号端口CSI-RS port信息、所述主波束的信道状态信息CSI测量结果、所述主波束的无线资源管理RRM测量结果。
  5. 如权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述UE根据所述主波束及所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量 信息生成所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收所述基站的下行信息，其中，所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息是所述基站预先配置的。
  6. 如权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述UE根据所述主波束及所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向所述基站发送上行信息，其中，所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是所述基站预先配置的。
  7. 如权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述UE在所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便所述基站根据所述主波束对应的一个或多个的上行SRS的测量结果确定所述UE的上行主波束；
    所述UE接收所述基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；
    所述UE在所述上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
  8. 如权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：所述UE根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量，确定所述至少一个辅波束，其中，所述辅波束的最大个数是所述基站为所述UE配置的，或所述基站和所述UE预先约定的。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    如果所述UE检测到所述主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且所述第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则所述UE将所述主波束作为辅波束，将所述第一辅波束作为新的主波束，并向所述基站报告新的主波束和辅波束的标识信息。
  10. 如权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    如果所述UE当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则所述UE在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与所述基站进行通信，其中，所述候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
  11. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    如果所述UE当前的主波束发生异常时，则所述UE选择预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，所述候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
  12. 如权利要求1至11任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号之前，所述方法还包括：
    当所述UE进入高频小区时，所述UE根据高频小区的配置信息向所述基站发送发现信号，以便所述基站根据所述UE的发现信号在所述UE的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向所述UE发送波束指示信号。
  13. 如权利要求1至12任一项所述的方法，所述波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
  14. 一种传输信息的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    基站在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    所述基站接收所述UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述至少一个波束中的主波束的标识信息，所述主波束由所述UE根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量确定；
    所述基站根据所述第一波束报告消息确定所述主波束。
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述基站接收所述UE发送的第二波束报告信息，所述第二波束报告信息指示所述主波束工作发生异常。
  16. 如权利要求14或15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述基站为所述UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息；和/或
    所述基站为所述UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
  17. 如权利要求14至16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述基站根据所述第一波束报告消息确定所述主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，所述第一波束报告消息还携带所述主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
  18. 如权利要求14至17任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述基站在低频小区上向所述UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便所述UE在高频小区上查找到所述至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在所述至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；
    所述基站在所述至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
  19. 如权利要求14至18任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当所述主波束和所有辅波束失效时，所述基站和所述UE通过所述主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
  20. 一种传输信息的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    用户设备UE接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    所述UE根据所述至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取所述至少一个波束的标识信息；
    所述UE获取所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
    所述UE向所述基站发送第一波束报告消息，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
    所述UE接收所述基站发送的主波束的标识信息，并根据所述主波束的标识信息确定主波束。
  21. 一种传输信息的方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    基站在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    所述基站接收所述UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
    所述基站根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定所述基站向所述UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
  22. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，所述用户设备包括：
    接收单元，用于接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    获取单元，用于根据所述至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取所述至少 一个波束的标识信息；
    所述获取单元还用于获取所述至少一个波束的信号质量；
    确定单元，用于根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量，确定所述基站向所述用户设备发送下行信号时所使用的主波束；
    发送单元，用于向所述基站发送第一波束报告消息，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述主波束的标识信息。
  23. 如权利要求22所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述确定单元还用于：
    当所述主波束发生异常时，向所述基站发送第二波束报告消息，所述波束报告消息用于指示所述主波束发生异常；或者
    当所述主波束发生异常时，在第二探测参考信号SRS资源上向所述基站发送SRS，其中，所述基站为所述用户设备配置第一SRS资源和所述第二SRS资源，并指示所述用户设备在主波束工作正常时从所述第一SRS资源发送SRS，在主波束工作异常时从所述第二SRS资源发送SRS。
  24. 如权利要求22或23所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述接收单元还用于在低频小区上接收所述基站发送的波束接收指示信息，所述波束接收指示信息指示所述用户设备在高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；
    所述接收单元还用于在所述高频小区的至少一个波束上接收下行信号；
    所述获取单元还用于获取所述高频小区的至少一个波束的信号质量；
    所述发送单元还用于将所述高频小区的至少一个波束中信号质量最好的一个波束作为新的主波束反馈给所述基站。
  25. 如权利要求22至24任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述第一波束报告消息还携带以下至少一种信息：所述主波束对应的物理小区标识、所述主波束对应的信道状态信息参考信号端口CSI-RS port信息、所述主波束对应的信道状态信息CSI测量结果、所述主波束对应的无线资源管理RRM测量结果。
  26. 如权利要求22至25任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收单元还用于根据所述主波束及所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息生成所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束，并在所述主波束对应的一个或多个接收波束上接收所述基站的下行信息，其中，所述主波束对应的 一个或多个接收波束向量信息是所述基站预先配置的。
  27. 如权利要求22至26任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于根据所述主波束及所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息生成所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束，并在所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上向所述基站发送上行信息，其中，所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息是所述基站预先配置的。
  28. 如权利要求27所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述发送单元还用于在所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束上发送上行SRS，以便所述基站根据所述主波束对应的一个或多个上行波束的上行SRS的测量结果确定所述用户设备的上行主波束；
    所述接收单元还用于接收所述基站发送的上行主波束标识信息；
    所述发送单元还用于在所述上行主波束标识信息所指示的上行主波束上发送上行信号。
  29. 如权利要求22至28任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述确定单元还用于根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量，确定所述至少一个辅波束，其中，所述辅波束的最大个数是所述基站为所述用户设备配置的，或所述基站和所述用户设备预先约定的。
  30. 如权利要求29所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述确定单元还用于：当所述用户设备检测到所述主波束的信号质量小于第二预定阈值，且所述第一辅波束的信号质量大于第三预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第三预定时间段，则将所述主波束作为辅波束，将所述第一辅波束作为新的主波束；
    所述发送单元还用于向所述基站报告新的主波束和辅波束的标识信息。
  31. 如权利要求29或30所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：
    当所述用户设备当前的主波束和所有辅波束的信道质量都小于第四预定阈值，且上述持续时间大于第五预定时间段，则在预配置的候选波束标识对应的波束上尝试与所述基站进行通信，其中，所述候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束和所有辅波束都失效时使用。
  32. 如权利要求23所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述确定单元还用于：当所述用户设备当前的主波束发生异常时，则选择预配置的候选波束标 识对应的波束作为主波束，其中，所述候选波束标识对应的波束用于当主波束失效时使用。
  33. 如权利要求22至32任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发送单元还用于：当所述用户设备进入高频小区时，根据高频小区的配置信息向所述基站发送发现信号，以便所述基站根据所述用户设备的发现信号在所述用户设备的发现信号所在方位的至少一个波束上向所述用户设备发送波束指示信号。
  34. 如权利要求22至33任一项所述的用户设备，所述波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
  35. 一种基站，其特征在于，所述基站包括：
    发送单元，用于在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    接收单元，用于接收所述UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述至少一个波束中的主波束的标识信息，所述主波束由所述UE根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量确定；
    确定单元，用于根据所述第一波束报告消息确定所述主波束。
  36. 如权利要求35所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收单元还用于接收所述UE发送的第二波束报告信息，所述第二波束报告信息指示所述主波束工作发生异常。
  37. 如权利要求35或36所述的基站，其特征在于，所述基站还包括第一配置单元，用于：
    为所述UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个接收波束向量信息；和/或
    为所述UE的至少一个波束中的每一个波束预先配置对应的一个或多个上行波束向量信息。
  38. 如权利要求35至37任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述确定单元还用于根据所述第一波束报告消息确定所述主波束的至少一个辅波束，其中，所述第一波束报告消息还携带所述主波束的至少一个辅波束的标识信息。
  39. 如权利要求35至38任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述发送单元还用于在低频小区上向所述UE发送至少一个波束的标识信息，以便所述UE在高频小区上查找到所述至少一个波束的标识对应的波束，并在所述至少一个波束的标识对应的波束上接收下行信息；
    所述发送单元还用于在所述至少一个波束中的一个或多个波束上发送下行信息。
  40. 如权利要求35至39任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述基站还包括第二配置单元，用于预先配置每个主波束对应的至少一个候选波束标识，其中，当所述主波束和所有辅波束失效时，所述基站和所述UE通过所述主波束所对应的至少一个候选波束标识所表示的波束进行下行通信。
  41. 如权利要求35至40任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，所述波束指示信号包括以下信号中的至少一种：小区发现信号、主同步信号、辅同步信号、广播信道信号、小区参考信号、信道状态参考信号、专用于指示波束标识的信号。
  42. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，所述用户设备包括：
    接收单元，用于接收基站发送的至少一个波束上的波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    获取单元，用于根据所述至少一个波束上的波束指示信号获取所述至少一个波束的标识信息；
    所述获取单元还用于获取所述至少一个波束的信号质量；
    发送单元，用于向所述基站发送第一波束报告消息，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
    所述接收单元还用于接收所述基站发送的主波束标识信息；
    确定单元，用于根据所述主波束标识信息确定主波束。
  43. 一种基站，其特征在于，所述基站包括：
    发送单元，用于在至少一个波束上向用户设备UE发送波束指示信号，所述波束指示信号携带所在波束的标识信息；
    接收单元，用于接收所述UE反馈的第一波束报告消息，其中，所述第一波束报告消息携带所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息；
    确定单元，用于根据所述至少一个波束的信号质量信息，确定所述基站向所述UE发送下行信号时所使用的主波束。
PCT/CN2015/076879 2015-04-17 2015-04-17 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备 WO2016165128A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2015/076879 WO2016165128A1 (zh) 2015-04-17 2015-04-17 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备
EP15888833.9A EP3280068B1 (en) 2015-04-17 2015-04-17 Method for transmitting information, base station, and user equipment
CN201580078695.8A CN107534467B (zh) 2015-04-17 2015-04-17 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备
US15/785,079 US10542544B2 (en) 2015-04-17 2017-10-16 Information transmission method, base station, and user equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2015/076879 WO2016165128A1 (zh) 2015-04-17 2015-04-17 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/785,079 Continuation US10542544B2 (en) 2015-04-17 2017-10-16 Information transmission method, base station, and user equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016165128A1 true WO2016165128A1 (zh) 2016-10-20

Family

ID=57125485

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2015/076879 WO2016165128A1 (zh) 2015-04-17 2015-04-17 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US10542544B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3280068B1 (zh)
CN (1) CN107534467B (zh)
WO (1) WO2016165128A1 (zh)

Cited By (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018084412A1 (ko) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 엘지전자(주) 무선 통신 시스템에서 하향링크 채널을 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
WO2018083624A1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and apparatuses for handling beam failure
US20180206218A1 (en) * 2017-01-18 2018-07-19 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining communication beam
WO2018144384A1 (en) * 2017-02-06 2018-08-09 Intel IP Corporation Control signaling for beam management
WO2018171478A1 (zh) * 2017-03-22 2018-09-27 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 上行数据传输方法、终端和网络侧设备
CN108632994A (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-10-09 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种传输寻呼信息的方法、装置和系统
CN108631830A (zh) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 电信科学技术研究院 一种发送波束确定方法、发送端和接收端
CN108702767A (zh) * 2017-02-06 2018-10-23 联发科技股份有限公司 用于多波束操作的波束故障恢复机制
WO2018236257A1 (en) * 2017-06-20 2018-12-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) OBSCURING THE BEAM EXPECTED IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
WO2019029608A1 (zh) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 波束报告的发送方法及终端
CN109391988A (zh) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-26 华为技术有限公司 信息指示的方法和装置
CN109756924A (zh) * 2017-11-08 2019-05-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种波束历史信息传输方法、终端及网络设备
EP3499742A1 (en) * 2017-12-12 2019-06-19 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting or receiving signal using beamforming in wireless communication system
EP3525504A4 (en) * 2016-11-03 2019-08-21 Guangdong OPPO Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A UPLINK SIGNAL, DEVICE DEVICE AND NETWORK-SIDED DEVICE
CN110169114A (zh) * 2017-01-06 2019-08-23 株式会社Ntt都科摩 用户终端以及无线通信方法
CN110268766A (zh) * 2017-03-24 2019-09-20 联发科技股份有限公司 通过物理随机接入通道进行波束识别以及有效运用物理随机接入通道资源的装置及方法
CN110351856A (zh) * 2018-04-03 2019-10-18 英特尔公司 确定用于pdcch的波束的装置和方法
CN110352567A (zh) * 2017-02-06 2019-10-18 三星电子株式会社 无线通信系统中用于波束搜索和管理的方法和装置
CN110521139A (zh) * 2017-01-06 2019-11-29 索尼公司 波束失效恢复
CN110720181A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2020-01-21 美国国家仪器有限公司 基于rsrp和csi度量的组合来执行波束报告的无线通信系统
EP3589057A4 (en) * 2017-03-22 2020-03-04 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA AND TERMINAL DEVICE
CN111066370A (zh) * 2017-08-24 2020-04-24 三星电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中配置波束指示的装置和方法
EP3668156A4 (en) * 2017-08-10 2020-07-01 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. BEAM SWITCHING METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM
CN111448837A (zh) * 2017-12-13 2020-07-24 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 用于无线通信系统中的波束故障恢复的方法和装置
TWI700902B (zh) * 2017-07-25 2020-08-01 聯發科技股份有限公司 用於波束故障恢復請求傳輸之方法及其使用者設備
EP3624492A4 (en) * 2017-06-16 2020-08-05 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. COMMUNICATION PROCESS AND APPARATUS
CN111742579A (zh) * 2018-02-15 2020-10-02 株式会社Ntt都科摩 执行波束失败恢复过程的方法及用户装置
US11057892B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2021-07-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Beam configuration method and apparatus
US11064492B2 (en) 2017-03-23 2021-07-13 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Resource configuration method and apparatus
CN114374994A (zh) * 2020-10-14 2022-04-19 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种波束失败信息的上报、接收方法、终端及网络设备
CN114982276A (zh) * 2020-01-31 2022-08-30 高通股份有限公司 事件触发的上行链路波束报告
RU2780806C2 (ru) * 2018-01-24 2022-10-04 Нтт Докомо, Инк. Пользовательский терминал и способ радиосвязи
EP4236105A3 (en) * 2017-03-21 2023-09-13 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Communication system
US12119907B2 (en) 2016-05-11 2024-10-15 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Method, system and apparatus

Families Citing this family (66)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10327166B2 (en) * 2015-04-21 2019-06-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson Method and apparatus for monitoring radio link quality
ES2844853T3 (es) * 2015-10-06 2021-07-22 Sony Group Corp Aparato y procedimiento
WO2017075803A1 (en) * 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Csi feedback processing and reporting for eb/fd-mimo
US10313953B2 (en) 2015-12-30 2019-06-04 Facebook, Inc. Micro-route characterization and selection
US10148557B2 (en) 2015-12-30 2018-12-04 Facebook, Inc. Link maintenance in point-to-point wireless communication networks
US10587499B2 (en) * 2015-12-30 2020-03-10 Facebook, Inc. Wireless node memory utilization for storing beamforming settings
WO2017123060A1 (en) * 2016-01-14 2017-07-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System, method, and apparatus of beam-tracking and beam feedback operation in a beam-forming based system
CN111818631B (zh) * 2016-01-26 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 识别同步信息的方法、通信方法和装置、可读存储介质
US20170303328A1 (en) * 2016-04-15 2017-10-19 Intel IP Corporation Antenna weight vector group identification for wireless communication
US10708953B2 (en) * 2016-04-18 2020-07-07 Qualcomm Incorporated Random access retransmission procedure
KR101980717B1 (ko) * 2016-05-31 2019-05-21 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 rrm 보고 방법 및 이를 지원하는 장치
EP3491868A1 (en) * 2016-07-26 2019-06-05 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (PUBL) Transmitting radio equipment, receiving radio equipment and corresponding methods for communicating using a reference signal
US11071145B2 (en) 2016-08-12 2021-07-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Rach conveyance of DL synchronization beam information for various DL-UL correspondence states
CN107889244B (zh) * 2016-09-30 2020-06-02 华为技术有限公司 通信方法、装置及计算机可读存储介质
EP3524000A1 (en) * 2016-10-07 2019-08-14 Sony Corporation User equipment and base station
US10849134B2 (en) * 2016-11-04 2020-11-24 Qualcomm Incorporated Indicating a range of beam correspondence in a wireless node
KR20190094389A (ko) 2016-12-13 2019-08-13 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 신호 전송 방법, 단말 기기 및 네트워크 기기
US10327183B2 (en) * 2016-12-21 2019-06-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Link switch in a wireless communication system
US10859713B2 (en) 2017-01-04 2020-12-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Position-window extension for GNSS and visual-inertial-odometry (VIO) fusion
WO2018128520A1 (ko) * 2017-01-09 2018-07-12 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 빔 관리를 위한 csi-rs 설정 방법 및 장치
US10148337B2 (en) * 2017-02-01 2018-12-04 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Beam management of downlink data channel and downlink control channel for 5G next radio systems
GB201701858D0 (en) * 2017-02-03 2017-03-22 Nec Corp Communication system
US10194442B2 (en) 2017-02-10 2019-01-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink resources for beam recovery
CN108633026B (zh) * 2017-03-24 2021-06-25 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 一种波束恢复方法及装置
US11223967B2 (en) * 2017-04-18 2022-01-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques to provide energy efficient radio resource management
CN108810931B (zh) * 2017-05-05 2024-07-05 华为技术有限公司 测量方法、终端设备和接入网设备
US10314056B2 (en) * 2017-07-14 2019-06-04 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Frequency-selective beam management
US11382018B2 (en) * 2017-07-27 2022-07-05 T-Mobile Usa, Inc. Wireless handovers based on device movement
US10820323B2 (en) * 2017-08-04 2020-10-27 Industrial Technology Research Institute Beam indication method for multibeam wireless communication system and electronic device using the same
US10686574B2 (en) * 2017-08-17 2020-06-16 Industrial Technology Research Institute Methods and apparatus for indicating a radio resource to a receiver in a wireless communication system
US10567064B2 (en) * 2017-09-08 2020-02-18 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Beam recovery for partial control channel failure
US10979917B2 (en) * 2017-09-16 2021-04-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and methods for communication beam loss recovery
EP3711183A1 (en) * 2017-11-17 2020-09-23 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) User equipment and network node for configuring measurements of cells and beams in a wireless communication system
CN112929985A (zh) * 2018-01-11 2021-06-08 华硕电脑股份有限公司 通过随机接入程序恢复波束失效的方法和设备
US20200127883A1 (en) * 2018-01-11 2020-04-23 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method and apparatus for beam failure recovery
EP3741050A4 (en) * 2018-01-19 2021-08-18 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited METHOD AND DEVICE FOR BEAM MANAGEMENT
BR112020014967A2 (pt) * 2018-01-24 2020-12-22 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Terminal e método de radiocomunicação para um terminal
CN110958634B (zh) 2018-02-09 2021-01-29 华为技术有限公司 用于周期性波束故障测量的系统和方法
CN110167055B (zh) * 2018-02-13 2021-12-14 华为技术有限公司 一种用于波束失败检测的方法、装置及系统
US11224048B2 (en) * 2018-02-16 2022-01-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Group based scheduled and autonomous uplink coexistence
CN110300451B (zh) * 2018-03-21 2021-09-10 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 波束指示方法、波束选择方法、装置、基站及终端
CN110299977A (zh) * 2018-03-22 2019-10-01 夏普株式会社 在用户设备上运行的方法及用户设备
WO2019185137A1 (en) * 2018-03-28 2019-10-03 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Devices, methods and computer programs for two-way beam failure recovery in wireless communications
CN110351059A (zh) * 2018-04-04 2019-10-18 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 用户设备及其对下行信号的处理方法及装置
CN112075029B (zh) 2018-04-06 2022-08-16 诺基亚技术有限公司 用于多面板ue的波束指示
US10887819B2 (en) * 2018-04-25 2021-01-05 Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp Motion detection and classification using millimeter-wave signals
CN112351501B (zh) * 2018-05-11 2024-01-19 成都华为技术有限公司 通信方法及装置
EP3794872B1 (en) * 2018-05-18 2023-08-16 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Beam failure recovery
CN112690012B (zh) * 2018-07-13 2024-04-02 株式会社Ntt都科摩 终端、基站、无线通信方法以及系统
EP3832903A4 (en) * 2018-08-03 2022-03-23 NTT DoCoMo, Inc. USER TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD
CN109156039A (zh) * 2018-08-07 2019-01-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 信息上报方法、装置、终端及存储介质
CN110839289B (zh) * 2018-08-17 2022-04-12 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种上行波束指示方法及设备
US11522598B2 (en) 2018-09-24 2022-12-06 Sony Group Corporation Method for interference reduction in a communication device
WO2020061952A1 (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-04-02 Qualcomm Incorporated Sounding reference signal (srs) guided downlink channel state information-reference signal (csi-rs) scan
CA3113126A1 (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-04-02 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User terminal and radio communication method
US11963151B2 (en) 2018-09-27 2024-04-16 Nokia Technologies Oy Beam failure recovery for serving cell
US20200146071A1 (en) * 2018-11-07 2020-05-07 QUALCOMM lncorporated Robust random access response
US11337080B1 (en) * 2018-12-17 2022-05-17 Softbank Corp. High altitude platform beam arrangement
US11109256B2 (en) * 2019-01-28 2021-08-31 Ualcomm Incorporated Beam reporting in a beam failure recovery request or a beam failure recovery procedure
US11553494B2 (en) * 2019-06-28 2023-01-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for signaling a beam for periodic communications
CN111818660B (zh) * 2019-08-05 2023-04-04 维沃移动通信有限公司 波束信息更新的方法、终端设备和网络设备
US11503482B2 (en) * 2019-08-13 2022-11-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for switching to fallback beam
CN112689329A (zh) * 2019-10-17 2021-04-20 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 波束配置方法及装置、电子设备及计算机存储介质
US11916725B2 (en) * 2020-02-07 2024-02-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Determining a duration of a resetting time period after uplink beam failure
CN113573353A (zh) * 2020-04-29 2021-10-29 维沃移动通信有限公司 波束报告上报方法、终端设备和网络设备
CN117375671A (zh) * 2022-06-30 2024-01-09 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 近场波束搜索方法、装置及存储介质

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013086164A1 (en) * 2011-12-08 2013-06-13 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for a millimeter wave communication system
US20130223251A1 (en) * 2012-02-24 2013-08-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Beam management for wireless communication
CN104115419A (zh) * 2011-12-16 2014-10-22 三星电子株式会社 在毫米波宽带通信中增强可靠性的方法和装置

Family Cites Families (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7583982B2 (en) * 2004-08-06 2009-09-01 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus to improve channel quality for use in wireless communications systems with multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) antennas
CN102664663B (zh) * 2007-07-05 2015-04-08 松下电器（美国）知识产权公司 无线通信装置、无线通信系统以及无线通信方法
EP2334122B1 (en) * 2009-12-14 2014-03-26 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH Method and apparatus for data communication in LTE cellular networks
KR101839386B1 (ko) * 2011-08-12 2018-03-16 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서의 적응적 빔포밍 장치 및 방법
US9439174B2 (en) * 2012-03-27 2016-09-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting beam information in wireless communication system
US9351288B2 (en) * 2012-06-05 2016-05-24 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Uplink channel sounding and channel state information estimation in mobile communication systems with multiple antennas
US9439096B2 (en) * 2012-08-13 2016-09-06 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus to support channel refinement and multi-stream transmission in millimeter wave systems
JP2015527026A (ja) * 2012-08-28 2015-09-10 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド １次ビームを使用する通信リンクのハンドオーバのための方法
US9750003B2 (en) * 2012-12-21 2017-08-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving control channel by beamforming in a wireless communication system
KR20150115931A (ko) * 2013-02-07 2015-10-14 인터디지탈 패튼 홀딩스, 인크 지향성 송신을 이용한 장거리 디바이스 검색
CN106688264B (zh) * 2014-06-13 2019-11-22 瑞典爱立信有限公司 自适应信标传送
WO2016157059A1 (en) * 2015-03-27 2016-10-06 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Systems and methods for selecting beam-reference signals for channel-state information reference-signal transmission
US10251046B2 (en) * 2015-06-01 2019-04-02 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for efficient link discovery in wireless networks

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013086164A1 (en) * 2011-12-08 2013-06-13 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method and apparatus for a millimeter wave communication system
CN104115419A (zh) * 2011-12-16 2014-10-22 三星电子株式会社 在毫米波宽带通信中增强可靠性的方法和装置
US20130223251A1 (en) * 2012-02-24 2013-08-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Beam management for wireless communication

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3280068A4 *

Cited By (77)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12119907B2 (en) 2016-05-11 2024-10-15 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Method, system and apparatus
AU2016428424B2 (en) * 2016-11-03 2021-12-16 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method for transmitting uplink signal, terminal device and network side device
US11350414B2 (en) 2016-11-03 2022-05-31 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Method for transmitting uplink signal, terminal device and network side device
EP3525504A4 (en) * 2016-11-03 2019-08-21 Guangdong OPPO Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A UPLINK SIGNAL, DEVICE DEVICE AND NETWORK-SIDED DEVICE
US11871396B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2024-01-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and apparatuses for handling beam failure
WO2018084412A1 (ko) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 엘지전자(주) 무선 통신 시스템에서 하향링크 채널을 수신하는 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
CN110050497B (zh) * 2016-11-04 2023-12-08 Lg电子株式会社 用于无线通信系统中的下行链路信道接收的方法及其装置
US10778386B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2020-09-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for downlink channel reception in wireless communication system and device therefor
US11350415B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2022-05-31 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and apparatuses for handling beam failure
WO2018083624A1 (en) * 2016-11-04 2018-05-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and apparatuses for handling beam failure
US11115984B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2021-09-07 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Methods and apparatuses for handling beam failure
CN110050497A (zh) * 2016-11-04 2019-07-23 Lg电子株式会社 用于无线通信系统中的下行链路信道接收的方法及其装置
CN110521139A (zh) * 2017-01-06 2019-11-29 索尼公司 波束失效恢复
US12068909B2 (en) 2017-01-06 2024-08-20 Sony Group Corporation Beam failure recovery
CN110521139B (zh) * 2017-01-06 2024-05-24 索尼公司 波束失效恢复
US11722361B2 (en) 2017-01-06 2023-08-08 Sony Group Corporation Beam failure recovery
CN110169114A (zh) * 2017-01-06 2019-08-23 株式会社Ntt都科摩 用户终端以及无线通信方法
EP3352507A3 (en) * 2017-01-18 2018-08-29 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining communication beam
CN108322246B (zh) * 2017-01-18 2021-05-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 确定通信波束的方法及装置
CN108322246A (zh) * 2017-01-18 2018-07-24 北京小米移动软件有限公司 确定通信波束的方法及装置
US20180206218A1 (en) * 2017-01-18 2018-07-19 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining communication beam
US10631300B2 (en) 2017-01-18 2020-04-21 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining communication beam
CN110168955A (zh) * 2017-02-06 2019-08-23 英特尔Ip公司 用于波束管理的控制信令
CN108702767A (zh) * 2017-02-06 2018-10-23 联发科技股份有限公司 用于多波束操作的波束故障恢复机制
CN108702767B (zh) * 2017-02-06 2023-01-31 联发科技股份有限公司 用于多波束操作的波束故障恢复方法及用户设备
CN110352567A (zh) * 2017-02-06 2019-10-18 三星电子株式会社 无线通信系统中用于波束搜索和管理的方法和装置
CN110168955B (zh) * 2017-02-06 2023-04-07 苹果公司 用于波束管理的装置、ue及计算机可读介质
WO2018144384A1 (en) * 2017-02-06 2018-08-09 Intel IP Corporation Control signaling for beam management
CN110352567B (zh) * 2017-02-06 2023-05-09 三星电子株式会社 无线通信系统中用于波束搜索和管理的方法和装置
EP4236105A3 (en) * 2017-03-21 2023-09-13 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Communication system
US12137356B2 (en) 2017-03-21 2024-11-05 Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Communication system, user apparatus and base station
EP3589057A4 (en) * 2017-03-22 2020-03-04 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA AND TERMINAL DEVICE
US11089596B2 (en) 2017-03-22 2021-08-10 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method for transmitting date and terminal device
US11128351B2 (en) 2017-03-22 2021-09-21 Datang Mobile Communications Equipment Co., Ltd. Uplink data transmission method, terminal, and network side device
WO2018171478A1 (zh) * 2017-03-22 2018-09-27 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 上行数据传输方法、终端和网络侧设备
CN108632994B (zh) * 2017-03-23 2021-12-21 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种传输寻呼信息的方法、装置和系统
CN108632994A (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-10-09 北京小米移动软件有限公司 一种传输寻呼信息的方法、装置和系统
US11064492B2 (en) 2017-03-23 2021-07-13 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Resource configuration method and apparatus
CN110268766A (zh) * 2017-03-24 2019-09-20 联发科技股份有限公司 通过物理随机接入通道进行波束识别以及有效运用物理随机接入通道资源的装置及方法
CN108631830B (zh) * 2017-03-24 2021-05-07 电信科学技术研究院 一种发送波束确定方法、发送端和接收端
CN108631830A (zh) * 2017-03-24 2018-10-09 电信科学技术研究院 一种发送波束确定方法、发送端和接收端
CN110720181A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2020-01-21 美国国家仪器有限公司 基于rsrp和csi度量的组合来执行波束报告的无线通信系统
US10785805B2 (en) 2017-06-16 2020-09-22 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Communication method and communications apparatus
CN111542093B (zh) * 2017-06-16 2021-08-03 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和装置
EP3624492A4 (en) * 2017-06-16 2020-08-05 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. COMMUNICATION PROCESS AND APPARATUS
CN111542093A (zh) * 2017-06-16 2020-08-14 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和装置
US11223410B2 (en) 2017-06-20 2022-01-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Obscuration of the expected beam in a wireless communication
WO2018236257A1 (en) * 2017-06-20 2018-12-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) OBSCURING THE BEAM EXPECTED IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
TWI700902B (zh) * 2017-07-25 2020-08-01 聯發科技股份有限公司 用於波束故障恢復請求傳輸之方法及其使用者設備
CN109391993A (zh) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种波束报告的发送方法及终端
WO2019029608A1 (zh) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 波束报告的发送方法及终端
EP3668158A4 (en) * 2017-08-10 2020-06-24 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. BEAM REPORT SENDING METHOD AND TERMINAL
EP3668156A4 (en) * 2017-08-10 2020-07-01 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. BEAM SWITCHING METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, AND COMPUTER READABLE STORAGE MEDIUM
CN109391993B (zh) * 2017-08-10 2021-01-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种波束报告的发送方法及终端
US10887814B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2021-01-05 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. Method of sending beam report and device thereof
US11589278B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2023-02-21 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. Beam switching method, mobile terminal and computer readable storage medium
US11191000B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2021-11-30 Vivo Mobile Communication Co., Ltd. Method of sending beam report and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium
CN109391988A (zh) * 2017-08-11 2019-02-26 华为技术有限公司 信息指示的方法和装置
EP3664345A4 (en) * 2017-08-11 2020-08-12 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. INFORMATION DISCLOSURE PROCEDURE AND DEVICE
US11653404B2 (en) 2017-08-11 2023-05-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Information indication method and apparatus
CN109391988B (zh) * 2017-08-11 2021-11-09 华为技术有限公司 信息指示的方法和装置
CN111066370A (zh) * 2017-08-24 2020-04-24 三星电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中配置波束指示的装置和方法
CN111066370B (zh) * 2017-08-24 2023-12-05 三星电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中配置波束指示的装置和方法
CN109756924A (zh) * 2017-11-08 2019-05-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 一种波束历史信息传输方法、终端及网络设备
EP3499742A1 (en) * 2017-12-12 2019-06-19 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting or receiving signal using beamforming in wireless communication system
US12034513B2 (en) 2017-12-12 2024-07-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting or receiving signal using beamforming in wireless communication system
US10812168B2 (en) 2017-12-12 2020-10-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting or receiving signal using beamforming in wireless communication system
EP4020835A1 (en) * 2017-12-12 2022-06-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting or receiving signal using beamforming in wireless communication system
US11271632B2 (en) 2017-12-12 2022-03-08 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for transmitting or receiving signal using beamforming in wireless communication system
CN111448837A (zh) * 2017-12-13 2020-07-24 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 用于无线通信系统中的波束故障恢复的方法和装置
US11057892B2 (en) 2018-01-19 2021-07-06 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Beam configuration method and apparatus
RU2780806C2 (ru) * 2018-01-24 2022-10-04 Нтт Докомо, Инк. Пользовательский терминал и способ радиосвязи
CN111742579A (zh) * 2018-02-15 2020-10-02 株式会社Ntt都科摩 执行波束失败恢复过程的方法及用户装置
CN110351856A (zh) * 2018-04-03 2019-10-18 英特尔公司 确定用于pdcch的波束的装置和方法
CN114982276B (zh) * 2020-01-31 2024-09-06 高通股份有限公司 事件触发的上行链路波束报告
CN114982276A (zh) * 2020-01-31 2022-08-30 高通股份有限公司 事件触发的上行链路波束报告
CN114374994A (zh) * 2020-10-14 2022-04-19 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 一种波束失败信息的上报、接收方法、终端及网络设备

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20180042000A1 (en) 2018-02-08
CN107534467A (zh) 2018-01-02
US10542544B2 (en) 2020-01-21
CN107534467B (zh) 2021-06-15
EP3280068B1 (en) 2019-10-09
EP3280068A4 (en) 2018-04-25
EP3280068A1 (en) 2018-02-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2016165128A1 (zh) 传输信息的方法、基站和用户设备
US11916836B2 (en) Interaction of discontinuous reception (DRX) with positioning reference signal (PRS) resources
US11102744B2 (en) Downlink synchronization method, and apparatus and system cross-reference to related applications
US11122472B2 (en) Method and system for beam tracking failure recovery
US11864038B2 (en) Method and user equipment for performing initial beam alignment during random access (RACH) procedure
US12069490B2 (en) Non-terrestrial single frequency network
JP7038816B2 (ja) 無線通信ネットワークにおけるユーザ機器、ネットワークノードおよび方法
US11864008B2 (en) User equipment and network node for configuring measurements of cells and beams in a wireless communication system
CN105637939B (zh) 终端、基站、基站控制器及毫米波蜂窝通信方法
EP3289795B1 (en) Methods and apparatuses for inter-network measurement in a wireless network
US10412767B2 (en) System and method for initial attachment in a communications system utilizing beam-formed signals
US11477664B2 (en) Dynamic beam sweep procedure
US11277761B2 (en) Technique for determining signal quality
KR20170106446A (ko) Ue의 위치를 획득하는 방법, 및 장치
CN110167203B (zh) 波束失败恢复的方法和装置
US20220124513A1 (en) Communication system, communication terminal, and base station
WO2021208069A1 (en) Csi feedback in high-speed train single frequency networks

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15888833

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2015888833

Country of ref document: EP